Home

Backup & Recovery™ 15 Home

1. 158 Please select hard disk or partition to restore IF you need to restore several objects at once please use Linux based Recovery Media Name Type File system Siz H E Frogram Files E Frogram Files x86 E ProgramData x E E System Volume Information J V E User B Administrator AppData E Application Data E Contacts E Cookies E Desktop SE Gal ma Documents i D PEE Downloads 2 P emr a 4 Archive Details Name Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 Paragon virtual image Yirtual Image Type Virtual Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GB To continue click Next Object size to restore 500 GB 7 Next you need to choose the way the selected data will be restored In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well how would you like to restore the files Restore to original location keep existing files The selected files will be restored to their original location IF such files already exist they will be kept Restore to original location replace existing files The selected files will be restored to their original location IF such files already exist they will be replaced with files from Restore files to The new location Select a volume and folder where to restore the files 8 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtua
2. 6 To map a network share please do the following Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 107 Remote location mapping A network share server spool etwwork Storage ey Map to drive letter E Make permanent connection Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Mark the checkbox to make this connection permanent Otherwise it will only be available for the current Windows session Specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Enter network credentials Enter your credentials to connect to server2 quest Domain WES0WENTO4ENM Remember my credentials x Access is denied e Click OK when ready 7 Edit the default archive name and description in the Archive details section if necessary Click Next to proceed Image details Backup name Backup HDODO_ 20131029 0713 Backup description Backup image 20131029 0713 8 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later Back up now Back up the specited objects to a virtual disk container after completing the wizard Generate script Create a script to back up the specited objects late
3. Name By default the program uses the provided address as the connection name which can be modified however You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 for FTP and 22 for SFTP by default 7 When ready click the Connect button to check out you ve got access to the provided location If yes you ll get a new item on the list named after this location By clicking the icon you can browse it to specify a more exact location for your backup At this stage you can also edit the default archive name if necessary Archive location itp master paragon software com paragon a EN Mame Size Date e CASTRATO HiDrive master paragon sofhyare com E 2china E Zrwidia EAST Press E Biglobe E Carbonite 5 E Cisca E Continuum dialogic E Drofa E Focalbeo_3 4 103 H FR B Archive details Archive name Jarc 11013120552346 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive Fs Ry No commen 9 To prevent unauthorized access to your personal data we strongly recommend you to password protect your backup Protect archive with password Please enter a password Password E Confirm password NU Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 130 10 On the Backup Summary page review all paramet
4. Parallel access to several FTP SFTP servers is limited only one password for all servers is available Adaptive Restore Technology Background Windows family operating systems are notorious for their excessive sensibility to hardware especially when it turns to replacement of such a crucial device as HDD controller or motherboard actually Windows will most likely fail to boot as a result of this operation In 2008 our company came with an exclusive technology called Paragon Adaptive Restore Initially aimed at restore of Windows Vista or Server 2008 from a backup to a different hardware configuration its current realization available in the P2P Adjust OS Wizard enables to make any Windows OS since XP bootable on dissimilar hardware by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for this type of migration Technology Concept Let s take a closer look at how Paragon Adaptive Restore works Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 23 Source environment ty ie a a Pal a wA ie Modifying OS ee lt Adjusting HAL intemal settings l Adjusting kernel gt va Pal ol all i ia we oe ee a Drivers for PSZ Modifying additional _ Resatting CPUS T AE a settings ee ee el Injecting drivers for boot critical devices and Nits From additional driver repositories Fram the Windows Repository Destination Environment As you see
5. The backup capsule can only be bootable if it is located on the bootable device Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 104 5 Preview the resulted hard disk layout and change size of the backup capsule if necessary by moving the corresponding slider or manually entering the required value It will be created at the expense of free space of the selected disk Your hard disk before creation of backup capsule Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev j ij eo Local Disk C 499 4 GB NTFS Tour hard disk after creation of backup capsule Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l 7 Local Disk C Backup Capsule 255 3 GB NTFS LO 243 6 GB Backup capsule curent size is 244 1 GB Min capsule size 340 MB oh 25001 3 MB Max capsule size 488 3 GB There is no restriction on the size of the backup capsule merely depending on the available space of the hard disk and the capacity needed for the backup If the wizard cannot find enough free space in one block it will redistribute free space joining all free space blocks together into one united block and moving partitions if necessary If the total amount of free space is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of space from one of the existing partitions thus resizing it If the partition is locked and cannot be resized the wizard makes the system reboot to 0 create
6. 156 To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Select Switch to Full Scale Launcher then click the Restore from VD item of the Wizards menu 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required virtual container e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Specity a base image for an increment Pit 9 4 2014 2 24 41 Sh YD Container FOO GE 3 3 GE 9 4 7014 1 41 36 M File level Archive i 97172014 5 06 32 AM WYO Container FOO GE F 5 GE E 97 17 2014 40425 M YO Container Switch to File view Archive File Details Name Backup HDDO_ 20140904 0217 Comment Backup image 20140904 U1 File E Backup HDDO_ 20140904 _0217 Backup_HDDO_20140904_021 7 phi Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 9 42014 224 47 4M View YD container detailed structure To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description i To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the sel
7. 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Convert to Basic MBR Hard 3 Disk Set the required number of primary partitions if necessary According to the DOS partitioning scheme a hard disk can have up to four Primary partitions If there is an Extended partition on the disk only three primary partitions are allowed That is why if a GPT disk contains several volumes the program enables to choose the number of primary partitions The rest of them if any will automatically be converted to logical disks within the Extended partition Y Conver the basic GFT hard disk to a basic MBR hard disk If there are more than four volumes on the disk only the first three may become primary and the rest logical The hard disk after convert Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Hew Volume H 115 8 GE NTFS The resulted hard disk should have at least 1 primary partition s Please select how many primary partitions you need Come J oe The program can only process dynamic GPT disks containing solid simple volumes without extension Converting Basic MBR to GPT The program allows you to easily convert a basic MBR disk into a basic GPT disk while keeping its contents intact The operation is quite safe for the on disk data but you should know that only 64 bit Windows OSes since Vista are able to boot from this type of disks So if you ve got a 32 b
8. Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey lf Use exclude masks Dont estimate size after excludes Mark this option to save time needed for migration with excludes operation if target hard disk ts larger than amount of uted space in partitions on source disk Disks of smaller size Will not be used as a possible destinations To choose the destination hard disk click Next Use exclude masks By default the program doesn t take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog If you need to use them please mark the checkbox and see existing specify additional filters on the next page of the wizard Don t estimate size after excludes You can save time by suppressing calculation of the resulted amount of data to copy after using excludes Please note however if you use this option drives that smaller in size than the source disk will be unavailable to use as destination e The target hard disk Select a hard disk if several where all data of the source disk will be copied to Select a target hard disk All data from the source hard disk will be copied there During copy operation target disk content will be deleted Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev A Local Disk C 499 6 GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Deyr 2 New Volume H 312 7 GB NTFS 437 2 GB Ep Backup Capsule Basic MBA
9. Eyer image made during the operation will be created as a complete base image f Differential type Eyer first image will be made as a complete base image all the others will be differentiated from it A differential backup only contains changes in the partitions contents with respect to a complete image e Base type Every image created during the operation will be made as a full archive e Differential type Every first image will be made as a full base archive and all the others will be differentiated from it This operation requires much less space thus considerably saving your system resources By setting the Maximum disk space to store images and the Maximum number of images to store parameters you may define when the operation will be cycled That means that on exceeding these two parameters the oldest archives will be automatically overwritten if choosing the Differential type only differential images will be overwritten Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 149 Maximum disk space to store images 10000 MB Es Maxinium number of images to store 2 10 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials To merge a full partition backup with one of its differentials thus getting a new full partition archive please do
10. Make permanent connection No archive selected Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to It Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Oo You can also map a network disk with Network Configurator e Choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image If you need more information on the selected backup object please click the corresponding link at the bottom of the section Click Next to proceed Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 153 Specity a YD Container to restore Look tr E Network Storage S servere spool 2 E 4 F Date H oinc 101 1072972013 8 15 03 AM H Linita 1072972013 8 18 17 AM H i inc_2_1_2 10429 2013 8 17 37 AM cele Gackup_HDDO_20131029_0713 phi 96 KE 10 20 2013 81818 AM Files of type YD Container files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Backup HODDODO 20131029 0713 Comment Backup image 20131029 0713 File 2 Backup HORO 20131029 _0713 Backup_HDDO_ 20131029 _0713 ph Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 10 29 2013 8 02 57 4M View YD container detailed structure
11. There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Onthe Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 168 Show all amp Ee Ek Archive Size 107 1072013 7 18 58 AM File level Archive 0 Bytes 11 1071072013 2 18 24 AM Filelevel Archive 13 KB eat 107 1072013 7 11 42 AM Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dev 120 GB 4 107 1072013 7 08 11 AM Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey 120 GB F J 1071072013 7 00 47 AM Filelevel Archive 71 9 MB J 10 10 2013 6 55 43 AM Filelevel Archive 24 KB clk J 10 10 2013 6 54 26 AM Filelevel Archive 71 9 MB 0 J 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM Filelevel Archive 71 9 MB amp 1071072013 21 49 AM New Volume G 14 2 GE T 1071072013 21719 AM New Volume G 14 2 GE 2 G 107972013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 477 7 GB 2 J 107972013 11 22 19 PM Filelevel Archive 24 KB 3 J 107972013 11 17 38 PM Filelevel Archive 599 5 KB gt Switch to File view Archive File Details Hame Comment File File system Used pace 32GB Local Disk C Mo comment is available Volume label No label NTFS 477 7 G
12. A network share server2 pool my_backup E Map to drive letter Z Make permanent connection men Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 119 Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Mark the checkbox to make this connection permanent Otherwise it will only be available for the current Windows session Specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Enter network credentials Enter your credentials to connect to server2 quest Domain Wes0WENTOIENM Remember my credentials es Access is denied Cancel e Click OK when ready 6 Edit the default archive name and description in the Archive details section if necessary This name will help to differentiate images of the specified backup object s from other backup images Each name includes the base part actually its name and creation date and time year month day and hour minutes Click Next to proceed Image details Backup name Backup_HDDO_201 40116_0316 Backup description Backup_image_201 40116_0316 7 On the Retention policy settings page choose the desired backup routine mode Retention policy settings Backup routine type f Create full backups only Use this option to make the program create only full backup im
13. By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Specity where you d like to restore Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 7 a Hew Volume E 470 4 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey il o Unallocated 499 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 WHware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey o Unallocated 749 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Object details Name Local Disk C Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 21 2 GB Used pace 10 6 GB Free space 10 5 GB Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 155 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 8 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the Switch EFI to boot from destination drive option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey 1 H N
14. A Hot processing options W Enable hot processing Hot processing technology Microsoft Yolume Shadow Copy Service Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service is a reliable technology designed to back up volumes being locked by numerous active transactions of W55 supporting applications Micrasoft 55 technology requires over 300 MB of free space on ary mounted NTFS volume for temporary data This technology i provided for Windows SF and newest Windows versions but unavailable for old versions of Windows 98 ME AT 72000 Additional options f Always use hot processing f Use hot processing only when partition is locked Hot processing temporary drive a Number of attempts to start 55 4 Timeout between attempts in seconda 120 Change run during backup options In this section you may configure the hot processing mode e Enable hot processing Mark the checkbox to enable the so called hot data processing mode that is specially designed to process data without restarting your operating system e Hot processing technology From the pull down list you can select the required hot processing technology e Always use hot processing Select the option to process partitions without making them locked Thus you will be able to keep working with them as usual e Use hot processing only when partition is locked Select the option to use the hot processing only when partitions are locked and cannot be processed without
15. But this service has not been started in your WindowsXP Windows2003 Vista Please start this service right click on My Computer gt Manage gt Services gt find Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service and make it active Set also to start it automatically 10 When running a backup operation with the Paragon Hot Processing mode enabled get an error error code 0x1200e Internal error during Hot Backup Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool You can find a name of the tool you need here http kb paragon software com 11 When running a backup operation with the Microsoft VSS mode enabled get the following error error code 0x12016 VSS can t read volume data Most likely your hard disk contains bad blocks Please fix the issue with your HDD manufacturer s tool You can find a name of the tool you need here http kb paragon software com 12 When trying to back up to a network share get the following error i o error or can t open create file Please check whether you ve got a permission to write to the selected destination or not 13 When trying to restore a backup archive get the following error Can t restore to current selection or Archive does not fit Most likely you re trying to restore a backup of the whole hard disk to a partition or vice versa 14 set up a timetable for a task but it fails to execute There can be a number of reasons for th
16. Carry out with the program all operations you need to schedule 3 Call the Save to Scheduler dialog by clicking its icon on the Virtual Operations Bar Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 87 schedule virtual operations All virtual operations you have made will be sawed to the scheduler Wo operations will be Task name Scheduled Task Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task Ln W Do not reboot if itis required Shutdown system after carving out the tasks Start the task ort 107 37201344 at 12 00 AM Every 1 day s Do not run the task after 10 13 2013 Speci User name and password Discard all operations on close 4 Inthe opened dialog enter the required task name and specify the task timetable 5 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Oo This command is unavailable if there are no operations on the List of Pending Operations Scripting The program actions can also be represented in form of a script The script describes the appropriate operation with macro language commands There is an interpreter utility SCRIPTS exe which is included in the program installation package This utility works in the unattended mode which enables to automate operations Startup You have no need to write a script since the program has a convenient interface for such a task In order to generate a script on the base of the
17. Partitions List Letters Map Below you can choose a hard disk drive and see all partitions on tt Information about drive letters assigned to these partitions is taken from the System Registry of the Windows installation selected Basic Hard Disk 0 500 GB YMware Virtual Type Actve FileSystem Volume label Size Drive letters Primary Yes System Rese 350 MB lt None gt Primary No NTFS No label 478 GB E Primary No Free 21 9 GB lt None gt Properties Edit letters 9 Click the Edit Letters button to correct an existing drive letter or assign a new one in the Windows System Registry Partitions List Letters Map Below you can choose a hard disk drive and see all partitions on tt Information about drive letters assigned to these partitions is taken from the System Registry of the Windows installation selected Basic Hard Disk 0 Type Active Primary Letters Primary Primary Change Release Properties Edit letters 10 Once you ve assigned the appropriate drive letter close the dialog then click the Apply button 11 Confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 187 A 3 pending operations Apply changes Yes No Details 12 After the operation is completed click the Report button to see a well informative summary page The program also enables to store the resulted report To do that just press the Save button and choose the exact location in the opened dia
18. Volume Explorer amp Refresh volumes information em Volume Explorer p Apply o Discard Miew Changes Undo Redo Reload Disk Info Generate Script Save to Scheduler QA Expre Name Size Mort E E Drives El ma na Disks EE 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 500 GB LB 2 VMware Mware Virtual S SCS Disk Device 499 9 GB E i E 3 Mware Mware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device fol GE El 4 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 120 GE H viua Drives 2 Browse for the required archive and then open it by double click of the left mouse button o Size Modified Name H Drives SE Hard Disks EG 1 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Device 500 GB I E 2 Vidware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 500 GB ai 1 Primary NTFS E 72 6 GB ES are_disk3 10 16 2013 9 02 11 PM H E arc_doc 10 16 2013 9 00 23 PM H E arc Image 107 1672013 9 00 56 Pe Sgm arc _epstem 107 1672013 8 57 56 Pe HE inc 171013045750652 10 16 2013 8 57 56 PM fy E arc_system pbf 57MB 10 16 2013 8 57 20 PM arc_aystem pfi BFBKB 10 16 2013 8 59 18 PM ke arc _system pfm TIKE 10 16 2013 8 57 19 PM E m System Volume Information 107 1672013 8 23 03 FM 1 2 Primary FAT32 F 20 9 GB lS Primary Ext2 E xt3 Ext4 Reiser 13GB i G4 Primary ExtevE sar att Reiser 19 2 GB EH A 3 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device fo GE ee 4 VMware YMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Device 120 GB f AR v
19. i e What to restore displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 53 What to restore Please select one of the objectis to restore File system Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE H New Volume E Primary NTFS 424GB 41 6MB H NEw VOLUME F Primary FAT 32 207GB 80KB ap E NEW VOLUME Primary Linux Ext 29 1GB 512 9 MB H EP New Volume Primary Apple HFS 229GB 14 7 MB Archive Details Marne NEW VOLUME lt Volume label NEW VOLUME File system Linus Ext Total size 29 1 GB Used space 512 9 MB Free space 28 6 GB To select where to restore the selected objectis click Next Data size to restore 29 1 GB ao If you want to restore the image contents click the Next button In order to cancel click the Cancel button Using the Archive Database To open the Archive Database click the Archives tab on the Ribbon Panel The database window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose and functionality Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 54 Backup amp Restore Mew Backup Format Partitioning Copy amp Migration Archives Schedule Volume Explorer Sof 7 Add an Archive to the Archive Database Restore Archive Restore Files Incremental Backup Check Archive Integrity Ck Mount Archive Delete from the Archive Database Restor
20. or a CD DVD disc its features defined by the wizard Oo This function is currently unavailable for modification of entire hard disk backups This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Recovery Scenarios New Backup Format Restoring an entire hard disk or system partition from network storage Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a backup of your hard disk on a remote backup server That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 152 To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Select Switch to Full Scale Launcher then click the Restore from VD item of the Wizards menu 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page you need to specify the required backup image e Mapa network disk where your archives are placed Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Specity a YD Container to restore Look in Local Disk C E X p Remote location mapping A network share E Map to drive letter EE
21. space is still not enough it is possible to split a fragment of space from one of the existing partitions thus resizing it four hard disk before the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Unallocated 119 8 GB four hard disk after the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev New volume curent size is 119 6 GB Min Volume Size 0 Bytes 122751 ME Max Volume Size 119 8 GB Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 69 If a partition to resize is locked and cannot be processed the wizard makes the system reboot to create the partition and then automatically boots the system again The rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows You can also choose whether the future partition will be primary or logical by marking the appropriate checkbox e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set a number of additional parameters Your hard disk after the changes Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey Volume label New Volume Assign the following drive letter E Partition type From the pull down list select a file system the newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that it will not be ready to use Volume label Enter a label for the selected partit
22. successful migration of a Windows system to a different hardware platform involves several actions 1 Change of the Windows kernel settings according to the new configuration The program detects the given hardware profile and automatically installs the appropriate Windows HAL and kernel 2 Installation of drivers for boot critical devices The program detects those without drivers and automatically tries to install lacking drivers from the built in Windows repository If there s no driver in the repository it prompts the user to set a path to an additional driver repository strongly recommending not to proceed until all drivers for the found boot critical devices are installed In case drivers for these devices are installed but disabled they will be enabled 3 Installation of drivers for a PS 2 mouse and keyboard This action will only be accomplished for Windows XP Server 2003 4 Installation of drivers for network cards The program detects those without drivers and automatically tries to install lacking drivers from the built in Windows repository If there s no driver in the repository it prompts the user to set a path to an additional driver repository These actions guarantee a Windows system will start up on dissimilar hardware After the startup Windows will initiate reconfiguration of all Plug n Play devices It s a standard procedure so please don t worry and prepare the latest drivers at this step to get the most out
23. wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not 1 By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to it thus they won t be added to the backup image 9 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 135 Exclude masks manage files and folders that will be excluded from archive Specht esclude masks T Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add fiter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter _cab Delete filter mst Delete filter _mep Delete filter dry Delete filter Auxiliary files 18 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category bak Delete filter old Delete filter tmp Delete filter _temp Delete filter err Delete filter EAA kai XII ie ee tilka 10 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive fa Ry No commen 11 To prevent unauthorized access to your personal data we strongly recommend you to password protect your backup Frotect archive with p
24. you need to mark the appropriate option at the foot of the page Archive Content Name Type File system Size Used Lacal Disk C Friman MTFS irr GB 320GB Archive Details Name Local Disk C Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 4777 7 GB Used pace 32GB Free space 445 6 GB Change backup settings 6 Onthe Backup Destination page select where you want to place your backup image There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive f Save data to the Backup Capsule f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CD DWO or BD 7 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name jarc_091 013135006539 Estimated archive size 5 5 GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space Oo available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive g Ry No commen Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 138 9 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the
25. 091013140825801 10 10 2019 6 51 48 AM are_101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM are_101013061434390 1079 2013 11 14 51 PM are_10101 3062909344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM are_101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM are_101013091716250 10 10 2019 2 17 49 AM diff_101013091744875 10 10 2013 2 17 52 AM fe ciit_101013091 744875 pb SB KB 1040 203 2 17 52 AM diff 101013091 744875 pim 31KB 10 10 2013 2 17 524M T Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Hew Volume G Comment Ho comment Volume label New volume File system NTFS Total size 14 2 GB Used pace 163 8 MB Free space 14 1 GB File C arc 101013091 7162507 dift 101013091744875 pot i To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 5 On the How to Restore page specify the way your archive will be restored In our case we d rather restore contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well Restore files to Original location The files and fold Original location h he place where they were archived from Specific folder When restoring Mes ma arean eren your computer f Leave existing files IF a file exists in the orginal location it won t be overwritten Only missing deleted files will be restored from backup C Replace existing files ALL selected files will be replaced with files from backup 6 Complete the wizard and then app
26. 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM PerfLogs 6 22 9019 8 22 35 AM Program Files 10 9 2013 5 50 43 AM Program Files 86 1079 2013 11 01 16 PM a ProgramData 10 9 2013 11 01 18 PM E di System Volume Information 1049 2073 6 17 05 AM a Users 9 3 2011 3 2 48 22 PM E Administrator 10 9 2013 10 26 37 PM a Default 6 22 9013 12 11 25 PM AppData 9 22 2013 8 36 30 4M w a 6 22 2019 8 36 30 AM Hi 6 22 2013 7 45 52 AM E Downloads 8 22 2013 8 36 30 AM Favorites 8 22 2013 8 36 30 AM Links 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM Music 6 22 2019 8 36 30 AM f Pictures 8 22 2013 8 36 304M 6 On the Backup Destination page select a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned disk as a backup destination Lookin E Local Diskit AAA Lame Date I E Local Disk C e arc 091013125156058 are_097013131559760 1079 2013 11 17 27 PM 10797 2013 11 22 08 PM arc_091013133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM arc 091013140817551 10 9 2013 11 08 51 PM arc 091013140825601 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM 10797 2013 11 14 51 FM 1079 2013 11 53 11 PM J arc 101013061434390 J arc_10101 3062903344 Ji arc_101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM arc_101013091716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM di PerfLags 6 22 2013 8 22 35 AM Program Files 10 9 2013 5 50 43 AM Program Files x56 10 9 2013 11 01 16 PM Users
27. 42014 224 47 4M View VD container detailed structure To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 109 Specity a base image for an increment Look in E Backup Storage E Ehl 4 Name Size Date Backup_HDDO_20140901_0453 9 4 2014 1 42 45 AM ER ine_1_01 9 1 2014 5 25 41 AM E e 320452501 ine_2_1_2 9 4 2014 1 41 36 M T Files of type YD Container files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Hame File increment 1 Comment Increment 1 File E Backup_HDDO_20140901_04537inc_1_0_1 inc_1 ph Type Incremental YD Container Parent E Backup HDDO_20140901_0453 Backup_HDDO_20140901_0453 pti Creation date 97 1 2014 5 25 41 AM View YD container detailed structure Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Our product enables to create several incremental chains to one base image provided each chain contains changed data of a particular backup object s This o
28. BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch the Restore Wizard 3 Onthe Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe Browse for Archive page choose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 178 Look in i Backup Capsule on Hard Disk 0 ha Ea 4 Mame F siBackup Capsule on Hard Disk 0 E are_091013125156058 Ge EDIFF 3025859001 0000000 E DIFF1 3025959447 0000000 are_09101 3125156058 pbt are_09101 3125156058 pfi 2 arc_091013125156058 pfm E are_111013111635639 are_111013111635639 pbt are_111013111635639 pfi are_111013111635639_0200p 000 are_111013111635639_0200p pim are_111013111635639_0201p 000 Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Local Disk C Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Used space 10 5 GB File rrac 091013125156058 pbt Comment 5 On the next page specify what you need to extract from the backup by marking checkboxes next to the required data items At the right lower corner of the window you can see the resulted amount of the selected data Hick the check box next to any file or folder you want to restore from Size 1 1 GE 20 9 ME 110 3 KE 215 8 KE 29 2 ME 1 1 GE 110 3 KE oof ME Total size 499 6 GB Free space 489 1 GB D
29. Disk E 350 MB NTFS 19 6GB NTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Local Disk D Unallo SFree 9 5 GB 19 5 GB Not formatted 40 4GB Troubleshooter Here you can find answers to the most frequently asked questions that might arise while using the program 1 try to run an operation but the program claims my partition is in use and suggests restarting the computer There are a number of operations that cannot be performed while your partition is in use or locked in other words Please agree to reboot your machine to make the program accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode run an operation and restart the machine as required but it just boots back into Windows without accomplishing the operation Please run chkdsk f for the partition in question cannot create a new partition on the disk There can be a number of reasons for that e The program cannot create a new partition on a dynamic disk e The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space It cannot convert a free space on an existing partition to a new partition cannot copy a partition There can be a number of reasons for that The source or target disk you select is a dynamic disk 4 primary partitions or three primary partitions and an extended one already exist on the target disk need to copy a partition But when selecting a place where to make a copy alway
30. E GiMaster Boot Record MBA O Bytes Local Disk Primary NTFS 350MB 2 hae M E Local Disk C Primary NTFS 2o0 3GB E Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE f First Hard Disk Track First Track 0 Bytes fae SiMaster Boot Record MER O Bptes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 495 6 GB e CSNEW VOLUME Primary LinuxExt4 350MB E Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive fol GB First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes kw Master Boot Record MER 0 T 4 The size of objects to back up 280 3 GE Estimated archive size 48 3 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 6 On the Backup Destination page select the Burn the data to CD or DVD option There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive C Save data to the Backup Capsule C Save data to localnetwork drives f Save data to physical partitions C Save data to FTP locations O Burn the data to CD OWD or BD 7 Select a recordable device on the list of available CD DVD devices and edit the archive name if necessary Select a recorder to burn archive images to Name Dic tppes 2 NECVMWar VMware IDE CDR10
31. EEL LLL LLL LLL Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 5 Onthe next page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 126 Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition you want to back up Name Type File system Size tee e E My Computer My Computer iv Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive n00 GB E First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes a E GiMaster Boot Record MBA O Bytes i T Local Disk Primary NTFS SOU ME 2 2 i M Local Disk C Primary NTFS 260 3 GBE E Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE f First Hard Disk Track First Track 0 Bytes fae SiMaster Boot Record MER O Bptes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 495 6 GB e CSNEW VOLUME Primary LinuxExt4 350MB E Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Har
32. Hard Disk 3 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey p Unallocated 119 JGB Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Result 64 Choose copy options that suit best your task Copy options HOD raw copy Partitions raw copy Ferom incremental copy j new EF bot eri fr destination ave Resize LS tiene Remove free blocks between partitions Copy data and resize partitions proportionally Mark the checkboe to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager for destination hard drive Copy options HDD raw copy to copy the hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation Partition raw copy to copy the on disk partitions in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uE
33. RW Paragon DVD Burner Emulator DYDO R DVD E lt gt Volume label My Data 9 Onthe Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list F Suboperation progress 1 Transfer user data Operation progress Copied so far 0 02 MB Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 00 Time to finish 00 00 00 Creating compilation image Used burner VMware IDE CDOR10 Vendor NECVMWar Quick media erasing it may take about a minute Session opening Data burning 11 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 12 Turn off the computer Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition The system fails to boot since some files are damaged If you have a backup of the system partition you can recopy these files to make the system be operable again 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux reco
34. Save data to physical partitions f Burn the data to CO DVD or BD 4 On the Select Destination Path page specify the exact place to copy the data to Please select the destination path where to save the data from clipboard Lookin E Local Disk iC il 9 F Address ON Hame h B Local Disk C arc_091013125156058 arc 091013131559760 Ji arc_091013133756622 Ji arc 091013140817551 arc 091013140825801 Total data size 15 9 HB Space available on destination 219 6 GB 5 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation Please overview the transfer options You can return to the corresponding page and change the options by clicking on title hyperlinks Objects to transfer Object s selected 1 Total data size T E GB 8 248 732 6358 Bytes Transter destination Destination path C4 Space available on destination 219 4 GB 235 596 853 760 Bytes Overwrite existing files No 6 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button Volume Explorer To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with Volume Explorer please do the following 1 Click the Volume Explorer tab on the Ribbon Panel Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 181 a Backup amp Restore Mew Backup Format Partitioning Copy amp Migration Archives Schedule
35. System HDDO Part1 Windows G SoftwareDistribution 3 Speech oo System fem system32 iy systemResources 3 Syswows4 G TAPI C Tasks 3 Temp 3 ToastData 9 tracing Total data size 30 3 KB Rename FG Delete F8 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 193 8 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to Burn data to CD DVD BD Choose this option tf you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DYVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 9 On the Select Destination Path page select your system disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Look in D NTFS 0 on Disk 3 New Volume p RECY CLE BIN 9 System Volume Information Users rlerizinis FS New folder F7 Delete Fs File name Imintidisk sdd L Select File type All files F 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accompli
36. This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account when the Send e mail notification on apply function is enabled By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite the required operation you can choose whether to receive an e mail notification on its completion or not i You won t be notified if an operation requires the system restart Viewing Disk Properties The Disk Map and the Disk and Partitions List are the main tools to get information on the properties of hard disks and partitions available in the system To know more on the subject please consult the corresponding chapters of the Interface Overview chapter Viewing Image Properties General information on backup archives can be obtained with the following tools Using the Restore Wizard e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject At first the wizard displays the Welcome page simply click the Next button at the foot of the dialog window The next page refers to Browse for Archive By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 50 Browse for Archive F Show al SBi 10 9 2013 10 33 47 Pe Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk De
37. before partition delete Ask confirmation when converting FATT6 to FAT 32 This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during partitioning operations e Request confirmation before partition deletion Mark the checkbox to activate an additional security mechanism Thus when going to delete a partition you will be automatically requested to enter its label e Request confirmation when converting FAT16 to FAT32 Mark the checkbox to automatically request confirmation before converting FAT16 to FAT32 There are a number of situations when this kind of conversion is the only way out to accomplish the operation For instance you are going to migrate your system to a larger hard disk with the proportional resize of existing partitions what is very convenient As a result you can get original FAT16 partitions go beyond the 4GB limit Thus without conversion to FAT32 this operation will in no way be possible to accomplish The same goes for any copy hard disk partition or restore hard disk partition operation involving an extra upsizing Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 44 Include Exclude Section Copy Backup exclude options E Exclude from CopyfBackup Specity masks for files and folders that must be excluded from copybackup operations Files that contains your e mail data 9 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category wab Delete filter pab Delete filte
38. bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition you want to back up Name Type File system Size tee e E My Computer My Computer v E Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes 2 fe Master Boot Record MER O Buttes BA Primary NTFS 350MB 2 hae M E Local Disk C Primary NTFS 2o0 3GB E Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE f First Hard Disk Track First Track 0 Bytes fae SiMaster Boot Record MER O Bptes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 495 6 GB e CSNEW VOLUME Primary LinuxExt4 350MB E Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive fol GB First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes kw Master Boot Record MER 0 TO 4 The size of objects to back up 280 3 GB Estimated archive size 48 3 GB a time Oo The current version of the program enables to make a cyclic backup of only one partition at 5 On the Backup Destination page select a mounted unmounted partition a network share or an FTP server to place backup images to Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location C yarc 09101314 723927 rA x F Hame Size Date LY My Computer fae G Local Dis
39. capability The program enables to choose whether any recorded CD DVD BD will be bootable or only the first one for a session or without that function at all Folder where the ISO image is to be placed When the user decides not to physically burn a CD DVD BD but create an ISO image file this very folder will be used to contain these images Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 37 FTP sites options D FIP site settings Look in P a e il X Address itp Create FIPISFTP location Ww Use SFTP connection Address stp stp hidrive strato com Port 22 Anonymous login Allow OpenSSH key based authentication Login RRERRENRREHE Password W Save password Name sftp hidrive strato com men In this section you can manage online backup storages located on FTP or SFTP servers By clicking on available buttons you can create modify delete an FTP SFTP location etc To create an FTP SFTP location you ve got to specify a number of options e Use SFTP connection Mark the option to connect to the desired SFTP server if necessary e Address Type in an address to the desired server e Port Specify the required port 21 for FPT and 22 for SFTP by default e Anonymous login Mark the option to set up anonymous connection Typical username for this type of login is anonymous e Use Active Mode only for FTP Mark the option if your provider requires this type of au
40. copy files and folders etc Paragon Restore with Shrink technology to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size taking into account only the amount of actual data of the image Paragon BTE technology to set tasks for execution during the system restart thus saving from the need to use a bootable media when modifying system partitions Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista 7 Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept Microsoft Dynamic Disk simple spanned striped mirrored RAID 5 to offer more management flexibility without the partition limitation of basic disks Dynamic storage can be particularly beneficial for large scale businesses when dealing with many physical hard disks involving complex setup Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 11 e GUID Partition Table GPT It is the next generation of a hard disk partitioning scheme developed to lift restrictions of the old MBR GPT disks are now supported by Windows Vista 7 Server 2008 Mac OS X and Linux Supported File Systems e Full read write access to FAT16 FAT32 partitions e Full read write access to NTFS Ba
41. drive letter for the selected backup image Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 95 Car Assign a drive letter This allows access to the volume by using the drive letter assigned The assignment Is Mok recommended if the volume contains a file system not supported by your operating system Assign the following drive letter iz However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letters 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation It is strongly recommended not to un mount backup images with Windows Disk Manager or other third side software Remove Drive Letter In order to un mount a backup image you should take the following steps 1 Selecta backup image in the Archive Database 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Unmount the Selected Archive Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Test Surface The program enables to test surface of existing partitions and blocks of free space for bad or unstable sectors If found any it automatically marks them unusable in the file system
42. entered parameters of the required operation you should take the following steps 1 Make sure the virtual mode of execution is enabled 2 Carry out with the program all operations you need to be scripted 3 Call the Generate Script dialog by clicking its icon on the Virtual Operations Bar Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Generate button to confirm the operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 88 Pee Generate script _ al All virtual operations you have made will be written to the script No operations Will be applied Please specify a name for the task script file jscript_1 41073_055711 732 psi W Add to Task List Witte a script comment here More options Ho e Script file name and location By default the program offers to add the script to the Task List with a name containing its creation date and time Unmark the Add to Task List checkbox to define an exact location and a filename for the script file The default file extension that is reserved for scripting files is psl which however can be modified e Add to Task List By default the script will be automatically added to corresponding list If necessary add a small comment to it In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance
43. etc Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 91 Lookin E LlocalDisk C E g Address ON Disk Drives Helle oF PerfLogs 8 22 2013 12 50 47 AM A fe Program Files 10 14 2013 10 48 56 PM Network Places fae Users 9 3 2013 3 24 45 PM Ge Windows 9 3 2073 10 55 03 AM a 2 DVD Drive D H E NEW VOLUME E H New Volume F Available operation scenarios e Restoring separate files and folders from a backu The current version of the program does not enable to access virtual containers and file archives with Volume Explorer File Transfer Wizard File Transfer Wizard is designed to make such operations as copying of separate files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible It may be of particular use in case of a system malfunction caused either by a virus attack or files corruption in order to get the system back on track again Besides it provides access to Paragon backups as regular folders to browse through their contents or copy required files Startup e Click Tool Button then select File Transfer Wizard There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 92 Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the transfer operation e Place to look for files di
44. following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Hide Unhide Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation 1 It is strongly recommended not to hide the system partition Otherwise your operating system will fail to boot Set Label of a Partition The Partition Label is a small textual field up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector It is detectable by any partitioning tool and is used for notification purposes only In order to change a partition label you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Volume Label il There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Enter a label for the selected partition C2 Are you sure you want to change label on volume F Please specify a volume label for easier recognition of your volume Please enter new volume label New Volume ee 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Change Partition ID Partition ID is a file system identifier It is saved in the Partition Table and is used
45. if you suspect any of the installed drivers of not matching your hardware e Keep the latest driver version Mark the checkbox to keep the latest version of drivers during the forced re injection You can use this option only when the above option is active 3 Just before the OS adjustment you can additionally e View all found hardware devices and their driver status by clicking The wizard names all devices according to their model description not some alphanumeric code which is very convenient So you can compare the listed devices with the given hardware to make sure the wizard has analyzed your system correctly 4 x e amp Intel R 82 2how al Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device ready supported hardware Controller Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device amp IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Driver is already installed e Filter devices without drivers by clicking Unlike the automatic mode where only boot critical devices storage controllers without drivers are being reported here you can view and inject drivers for network cards as well 4 x Ea amp Intel Only show devices without drivers Show all devices Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Driver not found Click here to find a dri
46. it thus they won t be added to the backup image 7 Specify exclude masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Exclude masks manage files and folders that will be excluded from archive Specht exclude masks T Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add fiter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter _cab Delete filter mst Delete filter _mep Delete filter dry Delete filter Auxiliary files 18 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category bak Delete filter old Delete filter tmp Delete filter temp Delete filter err Delete filter SS E 7 Xil Fiala tilki 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive N No commen Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 145 9 Onthe Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected partition archive containing information specified in the wizard It is placed into the same destination as the base image This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating an increment to a full file backup To update a file ba
47. it from backup or backup in sector by sector mode Note this option requires confirmation for each unknown or Unformatted partition during the operation Virtual container type Paragon Image pvhd Paragon Image pyvhd VMWare Image vroidk MS Virtual PC Image vhd Microsoft Hyper Image vhds This section contains options that will be taken into account when creating virtual containers e Unknown partitions policy Here you can define behavior for processing unknown or unformatted partitions skip from backup process in the sector by sector mode or ask the user each time this type of partition has been found e Virtual container type By default the program is configured to back up to pVHD Paragon Virtual Hard Drive Use this option to switch the resulted virtual container to VHD VHDX or VMDK Please note that the use of pVHD enables to get full backup images several times smaller than the original objects while incremental updates dozens of times smaller when comparing to VHD VHDX or VMDK which have some fixed size of blocks not dynamic Besides encryption and password protection are only available for pVHD However if you re having a VMware or Microsoft hypervisor at your disposal and are planning to do instant virtualization please make sure the used backup format matches your hypervisor Partitioning Section Partitioning options E Partitioning Options Confirmations W Ask for volume label
48. letter Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev K Unallocated 52 3 GB Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 46041 11 MB 95684 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 a 0 MB 53642 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition 53642 0 MB 53642 MB 8 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 9 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the computer Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Restoring separate files and folders from a backup The program provides a very convenient option to access backup archives and restore only data you need the so called selective restore functionality Restore Wizard To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with the Restore Wizard please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board
49. marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 45 By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the General copy and backup options File backup exclude options Be Exclude from file backup archives Specity masks for files and folders that must be escluded from archives Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wkd Delete filter _cab Delete filter mst Delete filter _mep Delete filter dry Delete filter Auxihary files 19 filters Add titer Rename category Delete category bak Delete filter old Delete filter tmp Delete filter temp Delete filter er Delete filter log Delete filter dmp Delete filter Add category In this section you can find a lot of ready made exclude filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup images Please note by selecting certain filters you specify what data will be ignored during file based backup operations thus you specify the data you d like not to be added to the resulted archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filter by clicking the Add category button 4 Filter Browse Description gt fou can use wildcards and as file name mask Wildcards i
50. name and password To run the task in the log off mode please specify administering login info by following the appropriate link in the left lower corner of the page The Shutdown System on Complete option enables to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 85 Managing Tasks All scheduled tasks are placed in a separate list which can be retrieved by clicking the Schedule tab on the Ribbon Panel Scheduled Tasks amp ak E Mai backup of Loc al Disk C scr e s101S 132945163 pel At 6 29 OD oe dE ESO ILE Run Mow Edit Script Delete Task Refresh List Properties On every task you can get in depth information including e The task name e The full path to the generated script of the task e Scheduled time of launch e Statistics on the last launch e Scheduled time of the next launch e Used account information e Comments to the task To easily manage tasks the program enables to arrange them according to a certain characteristic just by clicking on the required property items Oo This feature can be particularly beneficial when the Scheduled Tasks list contains too many You can also enable disable rename delete refresh or modify properties of the selected task Task Editor With the Task Editor you can easily modify properties of scheduled tasks To do that you should take the foll
51. of the Partition Table 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 84 Task Scheduling Automation of operations can really help you out when you ve got to accomplish certain routine operations on a regular basis as it enables to execute them without your involvement while optimizing your computer s work load Setting a Timetable Thanks to the embedded Scheduler you can set a timetable for execution of any operation It has two categories for time settings these correspond to appropriate items in the Schedule type menu e Initiating the operation by an event One time only i e the Once item When the system starts i e the At System Startup item When the user logs on i e the At Logon item e Initiating the operation periodically i e Daily Weekly Monthly Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task Daily Run the Weekly Monthly You need to select one of the variants Depending on your choice the scheduler displays a form that enables to set a timetable Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task W Do not reboot if reboot i required System shutdown after backup Start the task ort 10709203 4 at 12 00 AM Every 1 week s or Ww Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Do not run the task after 10 05 2013 Speci User
52. on geometry of the disk amount of sectors per track heads and cylinders For a partition e Drive letter assigned to the disk e Volume label if exists e Type of the logical disk e File system e Root entries e Serial number e NTFS version e Partition ID e Total size used space and free space in GB etc Besides you can modify practically any partition property by clicking on the required value For a block of free space e Total size in GB Status Bar This is the bottom part of the main window The Status Bar displays menu hints for each item the cursor points to Settings Overview To call the Settings dialog please click Tool Button then select Settings All the settings are grouped into several sections which functions are described in the following paragraphs The list of sections is placed on the left side of the dialog By selecting a section from the list you can open a set of options Oo To get a detailed description to any setting control or field of the program just click the hint button and then the object you need Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 36 Application Section CD DVD BD recording options CD DYD BD recording options Burm even COVDVOYBD disk to the end Choose this option to allow the disk to be copied by third party tools Recording speed Maximum recording speed r Fast recording Choose this option if you have good quality
53. preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 4 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image double click on it to proceed Please select the file with partition or hard disk image You can select image from list below on Double click Created on Archive path 2013 Oct 11 11 33 52 Partition farc_111013111 2013 Oct 11 11 17 06 Partition farc_111013111 2013 Oct 11 11 16 55 Disk farc_111013111 2013 Oct 11 11 16 55 Disk farc_111013111 2013 Oct 11 02 49 50 Disk Img_DO pfi gt Select Image id a1 r F 1 iie i HDD Fart arc_1110131 iL i n Pe e i i Boobs sare LI 1 6 Onthe Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 8 160 Disk preview File System Size Used Volume label Basic Hard Disk 3 Size 120 GB Primary NTFS 14 3 GB 164MB New Volume Primary NTFS 8 4
54. provided by the Microsoft VSS framework Paragon Hot Processing Technology Paragon Hot Processing is an online copy backup technology for Windows NT family operating systems Developed back in 2001 nowadays it is integrated with all copy backup solutions offered by the company Paragon Hot Processing is not exactly a snapshot technology though it has much in common with it During an online copy backup the program uses the kernel mode driver HOTCORE SYS to intercept and control disk write activity of applications and the operating system The hotcore driver as an integral part of the program is installed during the setup procedure that s why the system reboot is required to complete the setup procedure For the most part the driver is in the idle mode until it is activated with the program While in this mode it bypasses any calls having no effect on the overall system performance but a few kilobytes of the system memory Paragon Hot Processing technology offers copy backup of locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements Oo It is not recommended to use Paragon Hot Processing with active SQL Server Exchange or Oracle databases since the backup image contents may be corrupted Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 25 Volume Shadow Copy Service Microsoft Volume Shadow Copy Service VSS is design
55. ready Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 206 da Network utilities Unity Fing amp f Target wwwgooglecom Ns Ping the specified hast until stopped Resolve addresses to hostnames Saito as Number of echo requests to send 1 Start Running ping www google com Pinging www google com 173 194 71 103 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 173 194 71 103 bytes 32 time 271ms TTL 128 Reply from 173 194 771 103 bytes 32 time 20ms TTL 128 Reply from 173 194 717 103 bytes 32 time 18ms TTL 128 Reply from 173 194 771 103 bytes 32 time 24ms TTL 128 Ping statistics for 173 194 71 103 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum 18ms Madmum 24ms Average 20ms ping www google com done Ping the specified host until stopped Mark the option to ping the chosen host for indefinite time Resolve addresses to hostnames Mark the option to display hostnames instead of IP addresses Number of echo requests to send By default the utility sends 4 echo requests which you can modify however 2 Ifyou need to trace a route to some network host please select Trace route then type in the required IP address or its name Click Start when ready Utility Trace route Target 172 30 10 73 Do not resolve addresses to hostnames Maximum number of hops to search for target 1 __ Clearoutput Wait timeout milli
56. s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Please note that only sector based images of the new type with a pfi index file are available to work with Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 139 Show partitions amp ER Ek 10 97 2013 7 08 28 AM NEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 6 MB al 1 10 9 2013 7 08 20 AM Local Disk 9 MB 30 8 KB 1 10 9 2013 6 36 00 AM New Yolure E 10 59 GB 47 MB 1 10 9 2013 6 16 13 AM Local Disk C 477 7 GB ae GEB j 1 10 9 2013 5 52 57 AM Local Disk C 499 6 GB 5 1 GB I 1 gt l Switch to File wiew Archive File Details Name Local Disk C Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 4777 7 GB Used space 15 9 GB Free space 461 7 GB File C farc_097073737 5597 60 arc_0970737 37559760 pfi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a sho
57. select the required filter in the left top corner of the page Browse for Archive F Show al SBi Show at CE Show disks Ta Show partitions h 2 43 04 PM Men Volume E Simen S pen PM NEW VOLUME F E 10 9 2013 10 41 54 PM NEW VOLUME 10 9 2013 10 33 47 PM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 VMware By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 52 Browse for Archive Look ir E Local Disk C mw amp F Local Disk C Ee arc new 10 9 2013 10 34 00 PM be are_new pb 264 5 KB 10 9 2013 10 34 00 PM Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware YHware Yirtual SCSI Disk Dev Comment No comment it available Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GE File Canc new arc new pbt To continue click Next Cancel ie The section below i e Archive File Details displays a short description of the selected image including e Information on a type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based e Whether the archive is compressed or not e Whether the archive is password protected or not e The date when the archive was created Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons The next page
58. that contains buttons organized in groups by functionality Each button corresponds to a certain program wizard or dialog Oo If you d like to hide all ribbon tabs click on the arrow button at the right top corner of the program window Set View Button You can adjust the working environment by choosing one of two predefined views general and legacy This division is quite logical allowing the user to filter out legacy wizards and dialogs that have to do with the old PBF backup format Please note that the legacy mode is not active by default T O General View Legacy features Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 32 Virtual Operations Bar The program supports previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual mode of execution In fact when the virtual mode is enabled the program does not accomplish operations immediately but places them on the List of Pending Operations for later execution The Virtual Operations Bar enables to manage pending operations BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY ly Cancel the last virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations Cancel the last undo virtual operation on the List of Pending Operations Display the List of Pending Operations Launch the real execution of virtual operations Cancel all virtual operations on the List of Pending Operations Generate a script out of all pending operations Schedule pending
59. the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Synthetic Backup 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page you only need to specify the required differential archive The program then will automatically find its base image e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp be Ee T 10710 2013 1 43 35 AM Local Disk 10 9 GE 2 0 GE G 1079 2013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 477 7 GE 26 7 GB J 10797 2013 17 22 79 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes J 1079 2013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KE 49KB y J 10797 2013 11 1518 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 165 5 MB ol 4 Switch to File View Archive File Details Hame Local Disk Comment MHo comment Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used pace 9 7 GB Free space 1 2 GB File Ya editt 101013084041587 pot To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also displ
60. the Windows version of the product Interface Overview This chapter introduces the graphical interface of the program The design of the interface precludes any mistake being made on the part of the user Most operations are performed through the system of wizards Buttons and menus are accompanied by easy understandable icons Nevertheless any problems that might occur while managing the program can be tackled by reading this very chapter General Layout When you start the program the first component that is displayed is called the Launcher It enables to run wizards and dialogs to specify program settings to visualize the operating environment and the hard disk configuration The Launcher s window can be conditionally subdivided into several sections that differ in their purpose and functionality Backup amp Restore Partitioning Copy Migration Archives Schedule Volume Explorer Backup 5 Complement Manage Check OD Retention ta WO from VO Backup to VD to WO Capsule Integrity Wizard for YD Backup Restore Advanced backup Backup utilities Apply Discard View Changes Undo Reda amp Reload Disk Info Generate Script Save to Sc Disk map Basic MBR Hard Disk Lopy Hard Disk Context sensitive a System Reserved E Local Disk C Convert to GPT hard disk Menu 350 ME NTFS 499 6 GE NTFS Update MER Change Primary Slots Edit iew Sectors Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VA ware Virtual 5 5C H Unallocat
61. the installation By clicking the Print button the license agreement may also be printed out Provide your product key and serial number On the Customer Information page you are to provide the standard customer information i e a user name and an organization Besides you need to decide whether to make the program available for all users of this computer if several or only for the current one On the next page click Change to install the utility to a different location by default C Program Files Paragon Software Paragon Backup amp Recovery 15 Home Edition Otherwise click Next to continue Do not install the program on network drives Do not use Terminal Server sessions to install and run the program In both cases the program functionality will be limited 7 Onthe Ready to Install the Program page click Install to start the installation or Back to return to any of the previous pages and modify the installation settings 8 The Final page reports the end of the setup process Click Finish to complete the wizard First Start To start Paragon Backup amp Recovery 15 under Windows please click the Windows Start button and then select Programs gt Paragon Backup amp Recovery 15 gt Paragon Backup amp Recovery wW The program provides wide opportunities in the field of hard disk structure modification so just to be on the safe side please make a backup of your data before carrying out any operation The first
62. the previously suspended services etc Everything depends on the used applications e Execute after finishing the backup process Here you can specify an executable file that will run after the backup process has been accomplished It may include commands programs that will move the backup image to a particular location etc Oo By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Hot processing options By clicking the Browse button you can get into the browser like window to choose an executable file Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 42 Lock in E LocalDisk C ml 9 F Ej Date Disk Drives ae Pe program 1022 2013 5 04 34 AM PoP o i di RecovenM eda 10 22 2073 5 01 15 AM 2 2 2 i i Ji rmb 10 22 2013 5 01 21 4M A 2 2 i scripts 10 22 2013 5 01 21 AM Network Places oa scripts 1022 2013 5 01 15 AM PoE i 7 ad uim 10 22 2013 5 01 22 4M J verifped 10 22 2013 5 01 22 AM i 7 J Vid ware 9 3 2013 2 41 44 PM i di Windows Defender of22 2013 12 09 07 PM i m Windows Joumal of ee 2013 12 12 42 PM i i di Windows Mail of22 2013 12 09 07 PM i ad Windows Media Player of22 2013 12 09 07 PM i Windows Multimedia Platform Ofeerfelll 3 8 36 45 AM i 7 di windows NT Brza 2013 8 36 31 AM i a Windows Photo Viewer of22 2013 12 09 07 PM i Windows Portable Devices Brear A013 0 36 45 AM F di WindowsPowerS hell oe 2013 8 36 31 AM di Program Files 86
63. timetable The resulted backup images will be placed into the specified destination a local or a network disk its features defined by the wizard Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 121 Legacy Backup Format Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image into the backup capsule please do the following 1 Create the backup capsule with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard 2 Enable the Legacy features view 3 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup i There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 4 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 On the What to back up page select Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition E rriall Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Cther Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 6 Onthe next page mark the appropriate opt
64. to change a serial number you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Serial Number There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Enter anew serial number for the selected partition It should contain 8 hexadecimal figures 0 9 or A F The operation cannot proceed until you enter all 8 symbols Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 80 TA Are you sure you want to change serial number of volurne Fy four computer may no longer boot or work correctly Please enter new seral number in hexadecimal format 7E 44 0571 3 440 4 CED o 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Hard Disk Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry hard disk operations supported by the program Converting Dynamic MBR to Basic The program allows you to convert a dynamic MBR disk containing simple volumes into a basic one while keeping its contents intact In order to convert a dynamic MBR disk into basic you should take the following steps 1 Selecta dynamic MBR disk containing simple volumes on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Convert to Basic 3 Set the required number of prim
65. up the specitted objects later 8 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a file complement to a sector level container To update only files you need since the last full virtual container please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select File Complement to VD 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Specify the required full base virtual container e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Specify a base image for an increment 9 4 2014 2 24 41 AM VOD Container FOO GB 3 3 GB 97 17 2014 5 06 32 AM YO Container 97172014 4 0425 AM YO Container Switch to File view Archive File Details Name Backup HOOO 20140904 0217 Comment Backup image 20140904 O21 File E Backup_HDDO_ 20140904 021 7 Backup_HDDO_20140904_021 7 ph Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 94 2014 224 47 4M View YD container detailed structure To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description D To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 115 e By clicking the Sw
66. well thus allowing to save more time and the backup storage The main principal here is the shorter the interval between increments the less data is backed up In general this type of backup is great except for one thing when you restore an incremental archive there will be processed the initial full image and all increments between which depending on the size of your backup chain may take plenty of time Anyway unlike backups the restore operation is an emergency which might not happen at all Paragon s incremental sector based archive employs an innovative technology that significantly improves the backup performance Its core is in introduction of a special index file pfi that keeps meta information on the corresponding incremental image It s much smaller than the image itself and is used to calculate the difference between the current and previous state of a backup object Thus when you re going to do an increment to a full archive of your system partition stored on the network only its index file is processed over the net a couple of megabytes at most not the entire image which minimizes both the network traffic and backup time Another new thing is change of a backup format all increments are saved in vhd Virtual Hard Drive containers Incremental Chain to a Sector Backup sunday Monday Tuesday Saturday Increment 1 Base Sector Increment 2 Backup Monday restore point Tuesday restore poi
67. 1 on Disk 1 NEW VOLU a F alma bm FE ranana ro Melsete FS 6 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source 9 MWindows System HDDO Partl Windows 9 SottwareDistribution 3 Speech 3 System 3 Systems2 3 SystemResources D Syswows4 C TAPI Cd Tasks 3 Temp 3 ToastData 9 tracing Total data size nia Calc Rename FG Delete F8 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 7 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Burn data to CD DVD item Please select how would you like to save the archive O Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to Burn data to CD DVDIBD Choose this option tf you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DYVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 8 Onthe Choose a Recorder page select a recorder from the list of available devices and then set a volume label by entering it in the appropriate field Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 191 Select a recorder to burn data to Vendor Product Type NECVMWar VMware IDE CDR10 CD R CD RW C Paragon CD Burner Emulator CD R CD
68. 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 26 primary partitions one of which can be an extended partition with logical drives However these operating systems also introduce a new disk configuration type dynamic disk which must be understood to effectively configure and manage hard disks Dynamic disk is a physical disk that doesn t use partitions or logical drives Instead it contains only dynamic volumes Regardless of what format you use for the file system only Win2K computers can access dynamic volumes directly However computers that aren t running Win2K can access the dynamic volumes remotely when connected to the shared folders over the network Dynamic disks can co exist on a system with basic disks The only limitation is that you cannot mix Basic and Dynamic disks on the same hard drive There are five types of dynamic volumes simple uses free space from a single disk soanned created from free disk space that is linked together from multiple disks striped a volume the data of which is interleaved across two or more physical disks mirrored a fault tolerant volume the data of which is duplicated on two physical disks and RAID 5 volumes a fault tolerant volume the data of which is striped across an array of three or more disks With dynamic storage you can perform disk and volume management without the need to restart Windows Limitations e Dynamic disks are not supported on portable computers e Dynamic
69. 4 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 127 Mark the checkbox to make this connection permanent Otherwise it will only be available for the current Windows session Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary 8 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name jarc_031 013135006539 Estimated archive size 5 5 GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another network drive needs to be selected 9 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive E Ry No commen 10 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Backing up files to an FTP SFTP server With our program you can protect the entire system separate partitions or particular files by backing up directly to online storages located on FTP or SFTP servers Please note however that due to certain limitations of the network bandwidth the use of FTP SFTP locations for storing many GBs of
70. 5 Select Restore disk or partition What objects would you like to restore Restore disk or partition Select disk or partitions from virtual container to restore to selected target disk partition or unallocated space Restore files and folders Select files and folders to restore them to orginal location or specific folder 6 The What to Restore page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Select the required item to restore Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 154 Please select hard disk or partition to restore IF you need to restore several objects at once please use Linux based Recovery Media Name Type File system Size Used F Backup _HDDO_201 31029 0713 YD Archive 11 5 GB 1 2 362 911 744 Bytes F Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 PVHD i Virtual Hard Disk Drive 500 GE Primary MHTFS SOU ME 256 8 MB Frimary NTFS el GB 10 5G6B Frimary NTFS dro 4 GE 490GB gt G ystem Reserved T Local Disk ic Ginew Volume Archive Details Hame Local Disk Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 21 2 GB Used pace 10 5 GB Free space 10 6 GB To continue click Next Data size to restore 21 2 GB Oo If you need to restore several backup objects in one operation please use the Linux based recovery media 7 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer
71. 5 Specify location of the resulted image in the Backup destination section If you d like to save it locally either enter a full path to the target folder in the corresponding field or use the Browse button to find it Backup destination Backup location C Users Administrators Desktop J Available space 10 GB If you re going to save the backup image on a network share or a physical partition a partition that doesn t have a drive letter in the system click on the Browse button In the opened dialog you can see several options Lookin E Local Disk C EX F Map Network Drive Address C UsersAdministrator Desktop Disk Drives archive_db H di PerfLogs Ji Frogram Files Partitions Ji Program Files x86 Users di Administrator di kchmviewer Contacts m Desktop Documents Downloads di Favorites a Hi aba Date Urg Ula U T AM Brar 2013 0 22 35 AM 10 22 2013 5 01 15 AM 9 3 2013 2 54 46 PM 9 3 2013 2 48 22 PM 107 2972013 6 36 23 4M 10 23 2073 7 12 13 AM 9 3 2013 2 46 42 PM 10 29 2013 6 45 32 4M 9 3 2013 2 46 42 PM 9 3 2013 2 46 42 PM 9 3 2013 2 46 42 PM a D AD A Dk Select Disk Drives to use a local disk as backup destination Select Partitions to use a physical partition as backup destination Click on the Map Network Drive icon to map a network share to use it as backup destination our case
72. 5 SCSI Disk a Hew Yolaine E 478 4 GE NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware YMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey H Unallocated 499 9 GE Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey p E Unallocated 749 9 GE Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Der Unallocated p 119 9 GB Change backup settings Note This option is recommended for advanced users only By default the wizard is configured to back up to pVHD Paragon Virtual Hard Drive If you d like to switch the resulted virtual container to VHD VHDX or VMDK additionally mark the Change backup settings option Apart from the desired virtual container type you can modify other backup parameters Please consult the Settings Overview section for more information Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 106 Advanced backup settings VD container options A E Enin Bn TE EOE EER yx VD container options Copy Backup exclude options Fassword protection Unknown partitions policy Ask user Specify how to process each unknown or unformatted partition skip it from backup or backup in sector by sector mode Note this option requires confirmation for each unknown or unformatted partition during the operation Virtual container type Paragon Image pvhd Paragon Image pvhd VMWare Image vmdk MS Virtual PC Image vhd Microsoft Hyper V Image vha
73. 9 3 2011 3 2 48 22 PM Windows 10 9 2013 11 01 29 PM E Local Disk F F New Yalume G a F pool eervere r 7 Edit the archive name if necessary Archive name Jarc _1 01013093650000 8 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup images Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 134 Include masks manage files and folders that will be added to the archive IF include mask i specitied all the files that do not conform to the mask will be omitted and wall not get Into the archive f Use include masks Readable files 44 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category Chm Delete filter htm Delete filter mht Delete filter html Delete filter pdf Delete filter txt Delete filter hip Delete filter rtf Delete filter doc Delete filter docx Delete filter ls Delete filter tls Delete filter wr Delete filter ppt Delete filter pptx Delete filter Add category You can also create your own filter by clicking the Add category button Filter Browse Description Ce You can use wildcards and to specify the mask cred e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or
74. 9 3 2013 2 54 46 PM di Users 9 3 2013 2 48 22 PM H J Windows 9 3 2013 10 43 00 AM File name Files of type Esecutable Files T cred The program provides the ability to work with three types of executable files exe bat cmd It is up to the user to write batch files to safely prepare applications for backup There are some certain general requirements for that e All programs and commands must execute sequentially and finish before the bat file completes its work e tis recommended to use external commands programs in the following format Start wait program exe The wait option will help to start an application and wait until it completes its work This will guarantee that all included commands programs complete their execution before the batch file does This function is only available when the Hot Processing mode is enabled The program enables to set parameters for an executable file directly from the line oO However if the file path contains word gaps it is necessary to enclose it in quotes in order to make the program distinguish between the path and the used parameters By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Hot processing options Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 43 VD container options MS D container options Unknown partitions policy Ask user Specity how to process each unknown or unformatted partition skip
75. A Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dev Burn Hard Disk on CD DVD or BD GS Unallocated H E Bytes 7493 9 GB Mo label No Me E Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCSI Disk Dew G Unallocated Restore Hard Disk Bytes 119 9GB No label No Ne Update MIER Convert to GPT hard disk T Undelete Partitions Wipe Hard Disk EditWiew Sectors Properties The Disk and Partitions List provides detailed information on all hard disks and partitions found in the system including the following properties Name Volume label if exists Drive letter File system type Volume size Amount of used and unused free space Active Inactive attribute Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 34 Hidden Unhidden attribute The Disk and Partitions List is synchronized with the Context sensitive Menu and the Properties Panel Thus by selecting a disk on the list the two will automatically display detailed information on it To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Disk Properties chapter Oo Since the Disk Map and the Disk and Partitions List have the same purpose the user is allowed to extend only one at the moment by using a corresponding arrow button Context sensitive Menu The Context sensitive Menu shows a list of operations available for an object disk partition or block of free space selected either on the Disk Map or
76. AdministratorsDesktop Za Disk Drives eli Deis zan L Po archive_db Urea UT 1b AM a fee PerfLogs 6 22 2013 8 22 35 AM a e Program Files 10 22 2013 5 01 15 AM Partitions Program Files 86 9 3 2013 2 54 49 PM Users 9 3 2013 2 48 22 PM ER Administrator 10 29 2011 3 6 36 23 AM oe kchmviewer 10 23 2013 7 12 13 AM Contacts 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM SEP MDesktop 10 29 2013 6 45 32 AM d Documents 9 3 2013 2 46 42 PM di Downloads 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM di Favorites 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM i ave nale a O Fo 901 7 do aa Oh Select Disk Drives to use a local disk as backup destination Select Partitions to use a physical partition as backup destination Click on the Map Network Drive icon to map a network share to use it as backup destination our case 6 Edit the default archive name and description in the Archive details section if necessary Click Next to proceed Image details Backup name Backup_HDDO_201 310295_0713 Backup description Backup_image_20131029_0713 Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 114 7 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later eee EERE EERE ERE EEE Back up now Back up the specited objects to a virtual disk container after completing the wizard Generate script Create a script to back
77. All rights reserved 167 Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l i E Local E 67 9 GE M Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 1 96996 10263 MB 196996 MB p Backup Capsule 219 3 GB Please specify size of free space before the partition E OME Please specify size of free space after the partition 0 OMB Partition Restore Options Assign the following drive letter 9 On the next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Mark the checkbox at the bottom of the window to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the restore operation 11 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer Restoring a system partition from a local drive Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble after having installed brand new software But you ve got a backup of the system partition on a local disk That s just enough to easily roll it back to the point when run smoothly To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore
78. B Free space 445 6 GB Ce farc_ 101013062903344 7arc_ 101013062903344 pbf Total size To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 169 Look in Local Disk C EX F Name Size Date z E p r ac 091013125156056 pbi RT GE 10 9 2073 6 00 28 AM gt arc 091013125156058 pfi 28 9 MB 10 9 2013 6 00 23 4M fee are 091013125156058 ptm 110 3 KE 10 9 2013 6 00 27 4M di arc 091013131559760 107972013 10 37 14 PM di arc 091013133756622 107 972013 6 38 02 AM di arc 09101314087 7551 10 70 2013 7 17 43 AM di arc 091013140825801 10 10 2013 7 18 23 AM di arc 10101 3053219496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM di arc 10101 3061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM di arc 10101 3062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM di arc 101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM di arc 1010130917 716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM di arc 101013140759053 107 1072013 7 22 40 AM di arc 101013141139475 10 10 2013 7 12 58 AM Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details N
79. CD R RW DVO FAYAMW DVD RAM JAIS CD Bumer Emulator CO R R w 3 15 DYD Burner Emulator OVO4 A Ry Archive details Archive name BPOS O13 Mo more than 6 symbols and only in English Estimated archive size 3 1 GB Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 125 Oo Please take into account the Estimated archive size value It can give you a hint about the number of CD DVD discs required for the operation 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive F Ry No commer 9 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then place the resulted image to a network share please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe What to back up page select Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions REECE OEE CEEOL CEEOL
80. Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev Local Disk D i Unallocated 19 5 GB Not formatted N 40 4 GB 2 Drive letters in Windows and WinPE may differ so please do not use them as identifiers 4 Close the dialog then select Unlock Encrypted Volumes Use provided examples and grammar to unlock the required volume If you d like to see all commands of the manage bde tool please run it with the help parameter manage bde help Please use nanage bde Administrator X windows SYSTEM32 cmd exe So command to unlock BitLocker encrypted volume nanage bde un lock Drive rk lt PathloExternalkeyFile gt ch E nanage bde un lock lt Drive gt HecoveryPaseword lt RecoveryPaseword gt Drive drive letter Followed by a colon lt PathToExternalKeyPile gt external recovery key File that can be used to unlock the drive RecoveryPassword gt recovery password that can be used to unlock the drive Examples manage bde unlock C rk E RecoveryHKey bek manage boe unlock G KecoveryPassword 5254497626 HS 31621 7da risb slbi 16635 56272 705 078056 iP ale labret tel hoftware progransnmanage hie unlock e rk k ciyrecoverykey b As you can see on the screenshot above we re attempting to unlock volume E by providing a path to the corresponding recovery key recoverykey bek which is placed on System Reserved volume C The same dialog can also be called from the main
81. Ea EE 9 Supported TECNNOIOGIES assirian n aN a E E T E S Ri 10 Supported File Systems carecierslencucenaccceriedwetrcrtatecaeveienteersiccsncioduncatettcutearsiescetreiaccucsarantoncbidnueeriaeateceivasateolent 11 Supported Medid onna E E E E E E A 11 GENE StA O eror E E T E 11 SVEM REGUIT CMI CIIES rrrrrrrrrider ria nrorr terere r EEIE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE 11 STANAN sia A A E ET E A A E 12 PSE SCAU E E E EE E E 13 B ilding RECOVERY VIGO elses deta at eraeanscacasanec teas cues cnvareceaneasteanea a a E a ia 14 Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media cssscssscsssssccssccssccescnssccsccesecscccsecesccecceseseseseccusssesesescessees 14 Se e i e EEE svn gn casts e vee A S even ce N eat S pects E E E E E O E ute ecusi E E E 14 POOTO M E E E E E ences see taeadeeetecamseeceaeeseecaee 15 Booting from the WinPE Recovery Meia cscscsccccscscsccscscsccccccscsccccecscnccececscsccccecscsceccecscscescececsceseececsces 17 C r E E E E A E E A E 17 BASIC CONCE DIS arion E E E 18 System and Data Protection sesessesesessesescesescecescesescecescecessecessscecescesoscecescesssoecescecsesesesoecesoecesoscesseceseeceeee 18 Fie BackUp Ver us ector BICK eer E E E unused oarnt 18 PaCKUD iV 8 21s a E E Cree ee ee ea ee eee ee ee 19 Bac LID SON AS E E 21 PAID UV SRS O aparssececaepestce ec saeacna te cancne E ot asain onewaveaiacoeaetensneedsccesanitueeneesgectoe nation 22 Paragon Hot Processing amp Volume Shadow Copy Service css
82. FI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Resize options Remove free blocks between partitions not to keep blocks of free space between partitions on the targeted hard disk Copy data and resize partitions proportionally to make the program proportionally change the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when upgrading the hard disk to a larger one After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing hard disk To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios Migrating system to a new HDD up to 2 2TB in size Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 65 Cloning Partitions You can duplicate partitions to protect oneself from downtime in case of a system malfunction or for cloning sample partitions The program enables to duplicate all partition data including files the exact structure of directories and file system metadata location of files security information access quotas etc The Copy Partition Wizard will help
83. GB 6 9 MB New Volume Type Image of the hard disk Archive path fmntdisk sdb2 Img_D3 pbt Created 2013 Oct 10 Thd 04 49 39 hl To continue restore process click Next On the next page specify a hard disk to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Basic Hard Disk O VMware Virtual 500 GB mi tn ee Basic Hard Disk 1 VMware Virtual 500 GB NTFS New Volume D NTFS New Volume Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware Virtual 750 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware Virtual 120 GB Mi Model Vvhware Virtual Size 500 GB File Baten Size Used Free Volume label Active Hidden Basic Hard Disk 0 Size 500 GB oO Primary NTFS 350 MB 257 MB 93 1 MBE System Resen No Mo 1 E Primary NTFS 191 GE 60 9 GB 130 GB No label No No 2 Primary BackupCapsule 141 GB 7 8 GB 133 GB BC Yes Yes 3 Primary Free 168 GB No No You can also make the program resize the on disk partitions proportionally if necessary by marking the appropriate checkbox All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process Co
84. GB NTFS 40 4GB The same action can also be accomplished through the manage bde command line tool For more information please consult the next scenario In WinPE 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Oo To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Goto the Security and BitLocker Encryption section then select List of Volumes 3 Define volumes encrypted by BitLocker will be detected as Unknown If having several bitlocked volumes just our case you can pinpoint the required volume by its size oa XAwindows SYSTEM32 cmd exe ee A Microsoft DiskFart version 6 2 7208 Copyright lt 6 1777 2012 Microsoft Corporation On computer MINIHT IQCG HS9 Yolume GH Ltr Label Uo lume E F LD _KOM DVD ROM ahi Healthy Uolume 1 z System Rese WIFS Part it ion 358 Healthy Volume 2 E Unkno Partition 7 Healthy Volume 3 D Unkne Partition 7 G Healthy Fress any key to continue b If going to the main launcher of our program right now Open Advanced Interface you can see all unknown volumes detected as Not formatted just like it was under Windows Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 211 Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev aoa System Reserved C Local Disk E 350 MB NTFS 19 6 GB Not formatted a nanos j Basic MBR Hard
85. H p oF Physical partitions Fy System Reserved Disk 0 partition 1 Frima NTFS EN Network places E Network FTP Servers Archive name Jaret 01013094249110 6 Click on the Create an FPT Location button to set up parameters for the required SFTP location Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location tpi n D G Ea x Name size_ Date Create FI PSFIF location Use SFTP connection Address idrive strato com Fort a Anonymous login Use Active Mode Login F Password is W Save password Mame STRATO HiD rive Use SFTP connection Mark the option to connect to the desired SFTP server E Archive details Address Type in its address Port Specify the required port 22 by default Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 129 Anonymous login Mark the option to set up anonymous connection Typical username for this type of login is anonymous Allow Open SSH key based authentication If your SFTP provider requires this type of authentication mark the option to specify public and private keys and a passphrase Public key file Browse Private kep file Browse Passphrase Login Enter a login Password Enter a password Click Remember password to save it next time you back up to this location
86. Hard Disk3 Mi Model VMware Virtual Size 120 GB N Volume Type Filesystem Size Volumelabel Active Hidden D Primary NTFS 14 3 GB WNewVolume Wo No 1 Primary NTFS 6 4 GB New Volume Wo No 2 Primary Free 97 3 GB No No Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 172 All contents on disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changeson Basic Hard Disk3 disk before operations a oa mmm Tan disk after operations ne C E 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress ee Operation progress 1 Restore partition or disk Copied so tar 8 9 MB Read so far 14 0 MB 14 0 MB s Write so far 14 0 MB 14 0 MB s Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 06 Time to finish 00 00 00 Restore Disk 3 from file mntdisk sdb2 img_D3 pbt 2 Opening archive Img_D3_0300p 000 Restore Primary partition O disk 3 from file mntdisk sdb2 img_D3_0300p 000 Data writing Opening archive Img_D3_0301p 000 Restore Primary partition 1 disk 3 from file mntdisk sdb2 img_D3_0301p 000 Data writing Close 12 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the comput
87. ISOFTWARE GROUP G PARAGON Software GmbH Earacen Pa racon Heinrich von Stephan Str 5c 79100 Freiburg Germany Tel 49 0 761 59018201 Fax 49 0 761 59018130 Internet www paragon software com Email sales paragon software com Backup amp Recovery 15 Home User Manual Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Contents MOGUCU ON secacouceccceceveseccevsnecaasuescoucsscnacaawuvesaavesdesseuseusadsausensoe suns ued ces des corsecs stusaeanasaeserssescosuns 6 What s New in Backup amp Recovery 15 sssssssosessssoessosessssseososessosoeososessoeceososesessssosesessosososesessssososessesseosese 6 Product Components ssssesessecessecessecesoscesosoesescecescecescecesosoecssoesesoesessesesoscessesesesoessscesesseseeo 6 Features OVErVIEW vcaceiccvagcoinnsedeteave te sacwsenevieusnas soueamerdemsamesepneessiaamsenanumenerndeonvanaseenessesaaueeses 7 FOAGUPCS sissuccscscnvedensiencascseadcscsussencneaenscacsansecaisnewdens S EE a Eaa 7 User Friendly Fault Minimizing INterf ACE sernsconnnoninnan a NNSS 7 sela ea aee 4 EA OAE E E E E O E E E A E O E E E E ee E A E E EAA ees 7 RE COTE T CU TES ee ene ee E E E ee ere 9 COY FACO E EE A 9 Partition Hard Disk Management FACiITiCS sic siesescssciavsntacnadunctwsdasenaiapaususanansnbaanntuerasiaasessonsaunisuteauinbainnbnedaweadsiesadaasuvenntannnaameabases 9 Aoma a ONF CEO era E E E E AE E ueevanaaneieoeuevasenres 9 Auxiliary Facilities seeren
88. KPropertieSmeeionin an aa N A 89 VOUMe E XOTE ai ssi a a a ae 90 Fle aner VW ZA d n a a N a a a epee 91 VIG WING a TO ena a E ei hie tea S 93 WIOUIAE ACTIV Ss aiarect daca sea tasccuncnaasa sea nines te whoudaseecacasmennandanoa ANE E N 94 Te Ogle mere nee nena re ee Te re Oe Re eee oan ee eee 95 CHECIGENESVSECMM INEEN Vann a a e a teobeceeude Soesacenneearoanee sebum teoe duane aN 96 Check Archive MtEE FIL eee a a A a a a li tee id a decd ail ain 96 Check RECOVERY DISCS era E hdca Sauda aaa anna ce ea Naneaa tel eco el eee 99 EGIT VIGW SOCEONG code EAA E E A EE E E E AE E T 100 Send Loc gy lt tc Mee tree e a a eee ee ce eee ae 101 VIEW LOGS 2205s nsecedua a isnnkoacwone castialniagscwiesatetamabonduenecaashabiadeevenn are bbnnbea dua Nisaaaia eiaeadueaesatatanubcasn dace seeaeacaenbaecotess 101 Typical Scenari OS cenena EEEE E EE 102 Backup ScenarlOS anera a a a E a N 102 Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Creatine the BACK Capp Slee cos ies jo E a E 102 ING BACK UO FO i he spat cece teat tre nrc a a a a coe baecteataaneuae ueeceasecest 104 Legacy BackUp FOPMa Ussiievri estas e Javad taste a T hive nelaeeeals 121 RECOVERY SCO ANOS sorrera n E E aa 151 New Back p Formataimnniinn na E E 151 Leca CVBICKUD FOMO onien a EAA AE EO 159 Fixing Boot Problems without Restore cccccccssecccceseccccesececausececcuececceesecessuecessuseceeeeusecesaeecessunecesseeceeseenecesseneceesenes 182 Retrieving Transferrin
89. Locker is a security feature that enables to protect data of your volumes with 128 256 bit AES Advanced Encryption Standard encryption It has first appeared in Windows Vista Enterprise and Vista Ultimate to protect contents of hard disks from offline attacks for instance when your hard disk is stolen and connected to another computer to retrieve data it contains Our product enables to work with volumes encrypted by BitLocker but only when they are unlocked Until that locked volumes will be recognized in the program s interface as Not formatted You can unlock this type of volumes only through Windows native facilities e Graphical user interface for Windows e manage bde command line tool for Windows and the WinPE recovery media To know more on the subject please consult the How to Work with Bitlocked Volumes chapter In the current version of our product the following operations are allowed to accomplish on volumes encrypted by BitLocker e Backup Partition e Restore Partition e Copy Partition e Delete Partition e Change Volume Label e Add Remove Drive Letter e Hide Unhide Partition e Mark Partition as Active Inactive e Change Serial Number e Change Partition ID e Test Surface e Check File System Integrity e Properties Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 30 Windows Components In the given section you can find all the information necessary to successfully work with
90. M Local Disk 128 MB 47GB Backup_image_20131015_ 16349 1 Properties Panel that displays properties of the selected image 2 Volume Explorer that enables to access the selected image as a regular folder to explorer its contents or to retrieve certain files 3 Archive List that displays a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Besides the program provides all the necessary functionality to manage backup images in the database add delete mount refresh etc All panels offer a synchronized layout and are separated by vertical and horizontal expandable sliders allowing the user to customize the screen layout Data Backup and Rescue In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to establish a reliable data protection system Creating Backup Images Depending on a type of information you need to protect and the way this information should be processed the program offers a number of handy backup wizards To make your job with the program as easy and convenient as possible all backup wizards share similar work algorithm By going through steps of the wizard you configure all the necessary settings to launch the backup operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need S
91. New Volume G 14 2 GE 3KE 3 MHo co y G 10710 2013 21 FTI AM New Volume G 14 2 GB ee ME 1 G 1079 2013 11 29 07 FM Local Disk C 477 7 GE 26 7 GB j 1 J 1079 2013 17 22 79 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes I 1 J 1079 2013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KE 49KB kee 3 1 J 1079 2013 11 15 18 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 165 5 MB a i ike J 1079 2013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB aod Bytes 1 E 1079 2013 7 08 28 4M MEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 8 ME 1 G 1079 2013 7 08 20 AM Local Disk JME 30 8 KE E 1 G 1079 2013 6 38 00 AM New Volume E 10 9 GB 47 MB aE 1 G 1079 2013 B1B 1S4M Local Disk C 477 7 GE 5 2 GE 1 G 1079 2013 5 5497 AM Local Disk C 499 6 GE 5 1 GE g j IF Switch to File view Archive File Details 71 9 MB 75 470 833 Bytes Archive size 4 8 MB 5 134 266 Bytes Total size Backup date 10 10 2073 6 48 07 4M Comment Mo comment is available File Ce farc_09701 374082580140 archive phi Base archive C a 091013140825501 farce 09701 31 40825801 pbt To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also dis
92. O0 eb O2 64 bc 67 20 6d oan je O0 OF cd bh O1 d 02 ol 18 O0 O0 O0 10 ja Uc ja tf bo O0 75 O0 66 O0 07 ab f4 49 be 6l va 7o O0 om be c TE 28 55 v4 O0 68 Je de a0 56 76 df bh 42 O2 68 07 eb tO eb be 20 64 79 65 O0 15 je ic Of 46 Of 66 76 ja O2 cd od eb 75 O0 co ve 08 66 f6 eb 03 64 64 65 Bf O0 be 4c oan de 06 a5 11 al 60 O8 56 bh 13 ja Je 1 bo 75 2c O0 68 E 03 bh eb 20 O0 7o 4d 67 th on O0 O0 10 O0 04 v4 O0 13 O0 te od 55 64 75 54 O0 66 66 cd ed cd fi 69 Ta 69 be v4 20 or 3A DH oA gia 1 uoa8Ph Wag Tl anil 4 UEF A aDT Jr t F f tfh EYW lh h B V AL 2e 1 Sunyyv G uU Beel f u CF uz r Eh Eh SfUfh Eh ah 1 220 oi T E eee oe eee eo0oe7 Ekad e Alnvalid tion table loading op ng system g operating em c rlu g sf Close 1 Careless use of the Edit Sectors function may result in the irreversible data corruption Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 101 Send Log Files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and
93. Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 89 Oo This command is unavailable if there are no operations on the List of Pending Operations To learn more about scripts please consult the Paragon Scripting Language manual Extra Functionality This chapter describes the supplementary functionality available in the program View Partition Hard Disk Properties The program enables to obtain in depth information on the properties of hard disks and partitions Besides the general information such as capacity used space or file system type it provides the possibility to get info on hard disk geometry cluster size exact partition location etc To get properties on a partition hard disk please do the following 1 Choose a partition hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Properties There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Local Disk C Volume label No label File system NTFS Type Primary Capacity 499 6 GB 636 501 613 248 Bytes 1 047 855 104 Sectors Used by data 12 6 GB 2 13 630 279 680 Bytes 26 621 640 Sectors Free space 486 9 GB 96 B22 01 533 568 Bytes 1 021 293 464 Sectors In the opened dialog information will be grouped according to its properties thus by clicking tabs you can get information you need Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Soft
94. Please note by selecting certain filters you specify what data will be processed during file based backup operations thus you automatically ignore files that do not match so they won t be added to the resulted archives Anyway you ve got the option to create your own filter by clicking the Add category button E Filter Browse Description A You can use wildcards and as file name mask Wildcards lt in path are not allowed men In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 47 E mail Notifications and Logging Section E Mail options pA E mail options Specify your e mail account options Outgoing mail server SMTP User e mail address SMTP port number 0 Mp outgoing server requires authentication User name Password Send test e mail Click this Button to test e mail account options The program will send genera
95. Scenarios Creating the Backup Capsule 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Manage Capsule 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select a place on the disk where the backup capsule will be created It can be created as a primary partition or as a logical drive within an extended partition It can be inserted into any place on the hard disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 103 On this page vou can select a hard disk where a backup capsule will be created as well as the relative position of the capsule on the Hard disk Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey K Local Disk C 499 4 GE NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware YMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev te a Unallocated 499 8 GB Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey g Unallocated 743 8 GB n Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E I nallocated El Use the buttons to mowe the marker Backup capsule will be created where the marker is Sal By default the program allows the user to create the backup capsule only as the last Oo primary or as the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating i the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can remove this res
96. Service Offline versus Online Data Processing In the course of time there have been developed various methods of data processing Despite different work concept all of them can be divided into two principal groups offline cold and online hot data processing techniques As the name infers offline data processing can only be accomplished when the data is in consistent state the operating system and all the applications are completely shut down Actually it is the most preferable way of image creation or data cloning since software can obtain an exclusive right to process data that guaranties high level of operating efficiency However the offline data processing is absolutely out of question when dealing with 24 7 production environments In contrast online data processing enables to create a consistent snapshot even as the data is currently modified It is particularly useful for systems with high availability requirements but it won t be accomplished until all active transactions are complete The point is to provide a coherent state of all open files and databases involved in a process taking into account that applications may still keep writing to disks As a result an online data processing cannot boast high operating speed Our program supports both offline and online methods of data processing As far as online method is concerned it offers its own hot processing algorithm together with the possibility to use snapshot technologies
97. a changed since the time of creating a full or incremental file based archive It is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its increments to restore the latest point of this kind of backup Incremental Chain to a File Backup sunday Monday Tuesday Saturday Increment 1 Monday restore point Base File increment 2 Backup Increment n Tuesday restore point a Saturday restore point File Increment to a Sector Backup File Increment to a Sector Backup is a unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backup and the sector based backup With its help you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get it back on track in minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is critical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources Backup Storage Our program supports several techniques of storing backup images Let s take a closer look at them all to understand what kind of storage is able to provide better security Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 22 You can place a backup image to a local partition Despite the fact that it is the most convenient way try not to use it You
98. a monitor driver and a keyboard driver will be loaded Startup To start working with the Linux DOS recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on Oo CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 15 up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch a boot mode you need Normal Safe Low Graphics Safe in the Boot menu Oo By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will help you make the right choice 4 Consult the help system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject Boot menu 32 bit environment Normal Mode Main recovery g Safe Mode environnent Low Graphics Safe Mode amp Floppy disk Hard disk H MBR amp Find OSes on your hard disks e Normal Mode Boot into the Linux normal mode This mode uses the full set of drivers recommended e Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS mode This mode can be used as an alternative of the Linux normal mode if it fails to work properly e Low Graphics Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS safe mode In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be inc
99. a network connection with a pre mounted network share during setup Prepares hybrid both uEFl and BIOS compatible 64 bit recovery environment on flash or in an ISO image e File level backup restore for virtual containers o VHD VHD VHDX VMDK As promised Paragon s innovative backup imaging technology has been further improved and now opens up the option of creating file level virtual containers full incremental as well as file complements thus offering users rock stable high performance technology to protect system and data not only on sector level but file level as well This means that the old PBF format will eventually leave the scene e Predefined views The Windows 8 like streamlined tile oriented interface has been enhanced by predefined views which enable to adjust the working environment to particular customer needs Product Components In order to cope with different tasks the product contains several components e Windows based set of utilities is the crucial part of the product With the help of an easy to use launcher you may find and run tasks of any complexity in the field of data and system protection hard disk partitioning and cloning etc e Linux DOS based recovery environment is a multi platform bootable media that enables to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes Both Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights rese
100. abel No label File system NTFS Total size 4959 6 GB Used pace 9 7 GB Free space 489 9 GB 7 On the Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would like to restore the archive to Note that if you select an existing hard disk or partition ts content will be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 ibid Vieware Virtual 5 SCS Disk HEI Local Dis MC 36GB NTFS E Backup Capsule t t Total size 280 3 GB 793 GB Used 60 6 GE Basic HER Hard Disk Ife 219 6 GB Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 8 Onthe Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter If you ve got to do witha 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the Switch EFI to boot from destination drive option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH
101. ag a E aN aso ae ea a tear alas 31 Virtual Operon Bak anaa na A A AAN NAN 32 EX Dress IWIOUe BUTON rioni a A E OA 32 DEK M Iaea ON 32 DISK aNd PIONS LISTo e N A ANA E EA EAT EE E E T O e 33 C ntext sensitive IWICINU secu E NA 34 Properes Pane iheisieennn a a a a a a a a A 34 SEACUS Baiern ee E E E N E E E eee A E N E E 35 Setting S OVErVIEW einne nanne a EE TO 35 APPC I ON ECON oea a a T tease cncsvadess aise aasuaGewee tesco 36 BACKUP SECON a E eaeceanneeerae 38 PAO MING SECON aa a a a a r a A ENA 43 Hae hCG EXChiGe SCCLION aea a aa aa a a a a a A aucune aotieie 44 E mail Notifications and Logging SCCTIOM israse Ea A E E A A EE R 47 Viewing Disk PropertibS encena N E E E a a aA 49 VIEWING Image PLODEI CIOS cairar E E TEO E E E teneerauaeenne 49 Jsme the Restore Wizardiesrera n N N sa nace vega aeecetoada co wenaueecab ances Manaceeeasere ae 49 Using the ArEHIVe Database sranie aE atadeouaund wulsitous eee deena edie 53 Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Data BackUp and RESCUC Ss scsscsasccecdatasaresaciueceanreiaiaaanieiuccstassacaatsnedioaearalsassvenucaseauananaeieesucsiesaldeacusiegasdnavaaieudes 54 Creating BACK UDG ES tes eeheteatesiia sal bine atoiihetratehedcatnide can cuhdeo emt tacnamebed catnaitan amis uations taasameteseabasddaammubineat gatecaumunenes 54 RESCOMME SV SECM Al DACA sours occ aahecaet gai detisee ccctaatn diaens cee Gactiee ohdwedaadin Soew aidesanunapurdetineienbandn diene eed at leea
102. age click the Next button 5 On the Select Hard Disk to Copy page select a source disk a hard disk you want to copy On this page you can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk Will be copied to the destination you will choose on the next page Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i 4 Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i p i Unallocated 92 4 734 6 GB 6 On the Select Target Hard Disk page select a destination disk a hard disk to copy contents of the source disk Select a target hard disk All data from the source hard disk will be copied there During copy operation target disk content will be deleted Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey k i l i Unallocated 92 4 Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Unallocated 743 9 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Unallocated p 115 9 GE Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 195 1 During the operation all contents of the destination disk will be deleted On the next page of the wizard define the copy options In our case we d rather copy data with a proportional resize to occupy the entire disk If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot m
103. age provided there s only one incremental chain from it Otherwise the merge operation will be unavailable 4 The Archive Content page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Specity backup objects partitions or entire hard disks Name Type File system Size Used SJBackup_HDDO_ 201310250713 WDO Archive 11 5 GB 12 362 862 592 Bytes v Basic MBA Hard Disk O Virtual Hard Disk Drive 500 GE System Reserved Primary NTFS 350 ME 256 8 ME zid Primary NTFS 21 2GBR 105GB Nen plume Primary NTFS 478 4GB 49GB fa Archive Details Name Local Disk Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 21 2 GB Used pace 10 5 GB Free space 10 6 GB To specify increment properties click Next Data size to back up 21 2 GB Oo Advanced backup settings are unavailable for this type of backup 5 Edit the default description to the created incremental image if necessary Specify the required method of acquiring information on changed data Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 111 Incremental Image Properties Comment Increment 1 Diff compare method Compare metadata r Compare metadata Compare all data Compare changed data e Compare metadata default At first file system metadata on each source and backup volume will be analyzed As a result there will be built pairs of directory trees If having to do with NTFS directory trees wil
104. ages of specified earlier backup objects disks or partitions Below you will be able to set how many images you d like to retain on the storage Use this option to make the program create full and incremental backup images of specihed earlier backup objects disks or partitions Below vou will be able to set how many incremental chains you d like to retain on the storage and the number of images each chain should contain Additional options The masimum number of backup incremental chains to store i The masimum number of images for each chair 1 ial e Create full backups only Use the option to make the program create full images of the specified backup object s only Additionally you will be able to set the number of images 1 by default you d like to retain on the backup storage On exceeding this parameter the oldest archive will be automatically overwritten e Create full and incremental backups Use this option to make the program create full and incremental images of the specified backup object s By setting the maximum number of incremental chains to retain 1 by default you can define the desired number of incremental chains you d like to retain on the storage while setting the maximum number of images each chain is allowed to have 1 by default you can define Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 120 how often you d like full images to be created By using these two options you can k
105. ame Local Disk C Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 499 6 GB Used pace 10 5 GB Free space 489 1 GB File C sarc _0910131251560587arc_0910131 25156058 pbf i To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 5 On the Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would like to restore the archive to Note that if you select an existing hard disk or partition ts content will be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey p o Local Disk C p Backup Capsule 200 3 GB NTFS 219 3 GB 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation 6 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive letter Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 170 Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored p
106. are up to four times smaller than original backup objects In the current version of the product backup images can be made either in the old PBF or the new pVHD Please note that the pVHD support has a promotional goal In future releases pVHD will gradually take the primary role Below is the list of wizards that allow working with pVHD e Backup to VD Wizard Linux Windows WinPE e Incremental Backup to VD Wizard Linux Windows WinPE e File Complement to VD Wizard Linux Windows WinPE e Restore from VD Wizard Linux Windows WinPE e Check VD Integrity Wizard Windows WinPE e Retention Wizard for VD Windows What you get by using pVHD e Incremental imaging works much faster and rock stable in comparison with the old PBF e Only pVHD images can be used to do immediate virtualization e With the new backup technology available for customers as a new backup image format pVHD Paragon has also achieved easy support of any virtual containers VMDK VHD VHDX Dynamic Disks As you probably know MS DOS Microsoft Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Vista Server 2003 2008 support four primary partitions per physical hard disk one of which can be extended Certainly there is the possibility to create logical drives within the extended partition Such types of disks are called basic Windows XP Professional Windows 2000 Windows Vista and Windows Server 2003 2008 follow the same strategy You can have a maximum of four Copyright 1994
107. artition 767999 10263 MB 767999 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition E OME Please specify size of free space after the partition U OMB 7 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 8 The program will require the system restart to accomplish the operation in a special boot up mode Click the appropriate button to agree 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program After completing the operation the program will automatically reboot the computer This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive Let s assume that your Mac fails to boot because of a hard disk malfunction But you ve got a backup of your hard disk on an external USB drive Just replace the failed disk with a new one and carry out a bare metal restore To restore a dual boot Mac from a backup image located on an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to th
108. ary partitions if necessary According to the DOS partitioning scheme a hard disk can have up to four Primary partitions If there is an Extended partition on the disk only three primary partitions are allowed That is why if a dynamic disk contains several simple volumes the program enables to choose the number of primary partitions The rest of them if any will automatically be converted to logical disks within the Extended partition Ga Convert dynamic hard disk to basic h IF the disk has more than four simple volumes the first three of them will become primary partitions and the rest will be converted to the logical ones The hard disk after convert Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey k Hew Volume H 119 9 GE NTFS The resulting basic hard disk can hawe no more than 1 primary partitions Please select how many primary partitions the basic disk should have Oo The program can only process dynamic disks containing solid simple volumes without extension Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 81 Converting GPT to Basic MBR The program allows you to convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volumes into a basic MBR disk while keeping its contents intact In order to convert a basic or a dynamic GPT disk into a basic MBR disk you should take the following steps 1 Select a basic or a dynamic GPT disk containing simple volumes on the Disk Map
109. assword Please enter a password Password E Confirm password NU 12 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a differential to a full partition backup To update an image of the selected partition please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Differential Backup 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 136 e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp B Ee TS 1079 2013 11 25 07 PM Local Disk C 477 7 GB 26 7 GB J 107 972013 11 22 79 PM File level Archive 24 KB 309 Bytes J 107 972013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KB 4 9 KB J 107 972013 11 15 18 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB 165 5 MB J 107 972013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 4 KB 305 B 4 d Switch to File wiew Archive File Details Name Local Disk C Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 4777 7 GB Used pace 32GB Free space 445 6 GB Fi
110. at Windows Task Scheduler does not work properly Check whether it is so or not by scheduling a simple task call Notepad through scheduling You don t have permission to write to the selected backup destination Glossary Active Partition is a partition from which an x86 based computer starts up The active partition must be a primary partition on a basic disk If you use Windows exclusively the active partition can be the same as the system volume In the DOS partitioning scheme only primary partitions can be active due to limitations of the standard bootstrap The term backup originates from the time when the best way to protect valuable information was to store it in form of archives on external media It s become now a general notion to mean making duplications of data for protection purposes Bootable Archive is created by adding a special bootable section when backing up the data to CD DVDs Thus you will be able to restore the data from these archives without having to run the program but by simply booting from these CD DVDs Cluster is the smallest amount of disk space that can be allocated to hold a file All file systems used by Windows organize hard disks based on clusters which consist of one or more contiguous sectors The smaller the cluster size the more efficiently a disk stores information If no cluster size is specified during formatting Windows picks defaults based on the size of the volume These defaults a
111. ate 10710 2013 6 55 53 PM 10710 2013 6 55 52 PM 10710 2013 6 55 54 PM 10710 2013 6 55 54 PM 10710 2013 6 55 56 PM 10710 2013 6 54 57 PM 10710 2013 9 33 56 PM 10710 2013 9 33 57 PM 10710 2013 9 33 56 PM 10710 2013 9 33 49 PM 10710 2013 9 33 49 FM 10710 2013 9 33 56 PM Name G Local Disk E a E Recycle Bin H Earc 111013105344785 E Documents and Settings E Image Storage E PerfLogs E ProgramData E System Volume Information autoexec bat bootmar BOOTNXT checkvendor mst config sys pagetile sys PAT_Dell GUI_BMB_ea_xU msi quantile mre To continue click Next 6 On the How to Restore page specify the way the selected data will be restored In our case we d rather restore Size Type Partition 499 6 GB a File 24 Bytes File 417 6 KB File 1 Bytes File 20 KB File 10 Bytes File 1GB File 79 5 MB File FAB MA E Data size to restore less than 14 8 GB contents of the backup to its original location with replacing existing files as well Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 179 Restore files to Original location The files and fold Original location he place where they were archived from l Specific folder K When restoring Mes ma arean Exist on pour computer f Leave existing files IF a file exists in the orginal location it won t be overwritten Only mi sing deleted files will be restored from backup C Replace ex
112. ation is required what is very convenient The second possible application is the upgrade of a hard disk to a new one The capacity of a modern hard drive doubles every two years thus opening up new possibilities for software developers As a result programs become more complicated and require considerable amount of free space One day the user realizes that there is no more free space left on the hard disk and the only way out is to upgrade Usually that means that besides purchasing a new hard disk the user is to face a large re installation procedure spanning several days of tedious work But all of this can be avoided just by copying the contents of the old hard disk to a new one proportionally resizing the partitions And the last but not least is the copying of hard disks for cloning purposes It may be of great use when setting up similar computers There is no need for a system administrator to install an operating system from scratch on every one of them It is enough just to configure one and then clone it to the others Drive Partitioning As you probably know a hard drive is to be split into one or more partitions since it cannot hold data until it is carved up and space is set aside for an operating system Until recently most PCs used to have just one partition which filled the entire hard disk and contained an OS The situation has changed however thanks to new cost effective high capacity hard drives thus opening up numerous possibi
113. ay a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 150 Look ir F pool Swoervere r E 4 F Mame Size Date id pam di arc 0970131257 56058 10 10 2013 12 51 36 AM i di arc 091013133756622 10 10 2013 1 43 35 AM diff_101013084041587 10 10 2013 2 00 08 AM eee iff_10101 3084041587 pb 25GB 10 10 2013 2 00 09AM Files of type Archive files r Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Local Disk Comment No comment Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used pace 9 7 GB Free space 1 2 GB File Yl Backup Storage ditt 101013084041587 pot Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 5 On the Synthesis Settings page you can additionally modify any property of the selected backup image if necessary To accomplish our task we have no need to change anything at all lackuo image optiona s svete Eomae ARNG By Backup image options Password protection CO DYDED recording option W Control archive integrity Choose this option to allow writing of specific data that Will later be used during restore to check the archive Integrity It can slow down the backup operation W Set image file names automatically Choose this option to automatically name files in complex archive Compression level Normal compression Good compressi
114. be asked to restart your computer to complete the operation Check disk options Automatically fie file system errors 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check Archive Integrity The program provides the ability to check integrity of backup images The function allows distinguishing between valid and corrupted images before using them There are two wizards in the program one for checking PBF images and one for virtual containers op VHD VHD VHDX VMDK The work algorithm of both wizards is very similar Startup For PBF images e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Check Archive Integrity For virtual containers e Click the New Backup Format tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Check VD Integrity There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation For PBF images An archive to verify The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 97 By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any E Show archives Show all E Ei k Type Creation Date Source Object Size Archive Size Flags Compr Mounted 10 14 2013 2 20 44 AM Basic MBAR Har
115. boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional duplicate of the existing partition To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Partition Management In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to carry out partitioning operations supported by the program Basic Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish basic partitioning operations create format delete Creating Partitions The program provides the ability to create a new partition within a block of un partitioned space Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 67 Restrictions 1 Do not use the Create Partition function in order to undelete the last deleted partition 2 The program allows creating new partitions only within blocks of un partitioned space It cannot convert a free Space On an existing partition to a new partition 3 The program cannot create new partitions on Dynamic Disks Create Partition Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Pan
116. cal disks and blocks of free space e Volume label if exists e Drive letter e Total size e File system The Disk Map is synchronized with the Context sensitive Menu and the Properties Panel Thus by selecting a disk on the map the two will automatically display detailed information on it To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Disk Properties chapter Oo Since the Disk Map and the Disk and Partitions List have the same purpose the user is allowed to extend only one at the moment by using a corresponding arrow button Disk and Partitions List The Disk and Partitions List is another helpful tool that helps to get a clear cut picture on the current state of the system hard disks and partitions All objects disks partitions or blocks of free space on the list are sorted according to their starting position For every item there is the possibility to call a context sensitive popup menu with available operations Disk and partitions list Mame File system Yolume size Partition size Used Free Volume label Hidden Ac Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dev n00 GB E System Reserved NTFS 350 MB 350 MBE 256 8 MB 931MB System Reserved No YE G Local Disk C NTFS 499 6 GE 499 6 GE 11 GB 40 9 GB Mo label E Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev g 5 6 Unallocated Back Up Hard Disk Bytes 499 9GB No label No Ne Basic MB
117. can delete your backup just by accident or lose it as a result of a hardware malfunction or a virus attack You can place a backup image to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and system independence You can place a backup image to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in the operating system However it won t help you in case of a hardware malfunction You can place a backup image to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media is kept secure You can place a backup image to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Moreover by storing it on a special purpose server you may be pretty sure nothing will happen to it Finally you can place a backup image to an FTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection Known Issues on FTP SFTP 1 4 You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 by default You cannot restore data selectively with Restore Wizard from an FTP SFTP server You can browse an FTP server in the passive mode only
118. cess driver Vintvecwwandd int fron Windows driver repository L 8 The only action that might be required from your side is to set a path to an additional driver repository in case the wizard has failed to find drivers for some boot critical devices in the built in Windows repository Generally together with new hardware you get its drivers for different operating systems on removable media mostly CD or DVD By collecting all these drivers in one folder you can let the wizard automatically pick and install only those required for your OS Select Search for drivers in a specific folder The wizard has failed to find drivers for some devices What would you like to do Search for drivers In a specitic Tolder Specity a local or network path to the missing drivers z n Ignore all missing drivers Continue to adjust the 05 without injecting the missing drivers Which devices have missing divers Click on the link at the bottom of the page to see what boot critical devices have no drivers i The wizard names all devices according to their model description not some alphanumeric code which is very convenient 9 Though you ve got the option to continue without injecting missing drivers for boot critical devices The Ignore all missing drivers option we strongly recommend you not to do it Otherwise we cannot guarantee your Windows will start up on the new hardware Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All ri
119. chapter to know more on the subject Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to format Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to format Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 72 On this page vou can choose a volume you would like to format Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 iMware VMware irtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l p Local Disk C g data Z 256 1 GB NTFS 243 5 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l K Unallocated 115 8 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev 7 o Local Disk 743 9 GE NTFS M 1 As a result of this operation contents of the selected partition will be lost e Partition properties On the next page of the wizard you can set the following partition parameters Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev data 7 7 a 274 9 GB NTFS Partition type Volume label New Volume Partition type From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the selected partition taking its capacity into account Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive iden
120. choose the first option You have selected file complement to a volume arichive This archive can be restored together with the volume or you can only restore the files saved in the file archive f Restore only files A Note if you choose to restore archive together with a volume all data on the target volume wall be lost The contents of the volume Will be completely replaced from archive 6 Onthe Where to Restore page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Please select a place you would like to restore the archive to Note that if you select an existing hard disk or partition Its content will be deleted and replaced with the one from the archive Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l Ee Local Disk C o Unallocated 200 3 GE NTFS 219 3 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev g o Local Disk F 499 6 GB NTFS 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 177 7 On the Restore Results page you can see the resulted disk layout Besides there s the possibility to change size of the partition and its location if necessary as well as assign a particular drive
121. cking up directly to virtual containers pb VHD VHD VMDK complete support of GPT uEFI configurations Windows BitLocker and the latest Windows 8 1 as well as the option to create an advanced WinPE or Linux based recovery environment on CD DVD flash or in an ISO file the company has offered all the necessary facilities to build a bullet proof shield against any disaster In this manual you will find the answers to many of the technical questions which might arise while using the program i Our company is constantly releasing new versions and updates to its software that s why images shown in this manual may be different from what you see on your screen What s New in Backup amp Recovery 15 e Embedded Recovery Media Builder RMB 3 0 Instead of two utilities downloaded from Paragon s website BMB and RMB the new RMB 3 0 is now embedded into the product Combining the best of the two utilities it can boast more options usability and stability Prepares Linux or WinPE based bootable environment on a USB thumb drive or in an ISO image Doesn t obligatory require Windows Assessment and Deployment Kit ADK or Automated Installation Kit WAIK on Windows 7 and later platforms Can build WinPE based media on Windows XP Vista Server 2003 if there s WAIK installed in the system Allows injecting additional drivers for storage devices network controllers USB controllers or system during setup Enables to set up
122. ckup please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Create Incremental File Archive 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe Browse for Archive page specify the required full base file archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any be Be 7 107 972013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB T E 107 972013 11 15 18 PM File level Archive 293 5 MB T p 10797 2013 11 22 19 PM File leyvel Archive 24 KE i J 107 972013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KB es al 1 gt Switch to File View Archive File Details Total size 24 KB 24 576 Bytes Backup date 10 9 2013 11 22 19 PM Archive size 389 Bytes Comment Mo comment is available File Canc 0970137 315597604 archive phi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 146 Look in E Local D
123. component that will be displayed is called the Express Launcher Thanks to a well thought out categorization and hint system it provides quick and easy access to wizards and utilities that we consider worth using on a regular basis With its help you can also start up the traditional launcher the help system or go to the program s home page Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 14 oF Paragon Backup amp Recover 15 Home Paragon Backup amp Recovery 15 Home Backup to Virtual Disk Restore from Virtual Disk Log Saver D Copy Hard Disk BUILD RECOVERY ENVIRONMENT Copy Partition Oo To know more on how to handle the product s interface and accomplish typical operations please consult the Windows Components chapter Building Recovery Media WinPE and or Linux based recovery environments should be prepared on site with Paragon s Recovery Media Builder To know more on the subject please consult documentation that comes with this utility Booting from the Linux DOS Recovery Media The Linux DOS recovery environment can be used to boot your computer into Linux or PTS DOS to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes It also has the PTS DOS safe mode which may help in a number of non standard situations such as interfering hardware settings or serious problems on the hardware level In this case only basic files and drivers such as hard disk drivers
124. cscscscsccscsccccccscsccccccscsceccccscscescccecsceseccecsces 24 NE VEn E OMe Dara POC CS SIN aee E siesanasastancesetannrsantasreosuenens 24 Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Paragon HOt PROCESSING TECMNOIO OY sicarie seater ces aude focaein tecnicos E E deceboseutes 24 Volume Shad OW CODV SEVICE 52s oecaccp tees a cal aenice a aa a i uatradl oles Oueate adede a 25 OV UD SUD DOM ii siicacSce care varcecuawevossinevaveas neue cecaussaccastanwiesesays eveassaueuscans AE Ei 25 Dynamic DISKS sirscssiesteautescazcanicsecdasasaresaeiuadeasreiaiaeanieiucaseiesacaasinedioaaralsaaisenucaseauavanaeinesagsiesaldeneusiiegasdnasaaiecans 25 GPT Versus MBR sec ciiniee se eraascivtsasesedesceesccsan ee ceesusuneseeuscseaascaseas E EEE 26 UEFIIBOGOL Call OS ernn E E EE E 26 Apple Boot Cali ceirnin r eee eee 27 64 Dit SUD DOM aaie aE E E E O saucwieaeeenaias 27 CODY Operation nnna E a a 28 Drive P3rtutioniNg seni E EO E EE O O 28 Scheduling acs tives aeaa E E E E aE oe ENE 29 WINdOWS BICLOCK GM xcdscssecsscuscsectanssancenebreanduaaberoscuurensecuctanbeantenndeansbaabeceuseqessncweanceubsaaddnouteeescnsceeossensmeetoeteuates 29 WVINGOWS COMPONENTS sciscieusectastecceldsbeswieexenesetdeaeaewaewhecauldstensveeuesctoudaeuseveaneesceldateauetieresieiens 30 INtElTACe OVElVICW orania E 30 GNE rale VOU oean a a ANA 30 TOOrBO T Oa a E E A A E E eaaawicmmens tes 31 UO DOME ANE irori a E e ance O tg oes E E eae TA A E 31 SOT VICW BUON eane tal
125. ctor based increments due to the usage of the new image container pVHD 6 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive Ft Ry No commen 7 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive an incremental update to the selected backup image placed next to the base image Oo This operation can also be accomplished with the WinPE recovery media Creating a file increment to a full partition backup To update only files you need since the last full partition backup please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Create File Complement 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe Browse for Archive page specify the required full base partition archive e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any z E 1079 2013 7 08 28 AM MEW VOLUME 350 MB 1 5 ME a G 1079 2013 7 08 20 AM Local Disk JME 30 8 KE T 1079 2013 6 38 00 AM Mew Wolume E 10 9 GE 4 7 ME G 1079 2013 6 16 13 AM Local Disk C 477 7 GE 5 2 GE f ji T 1079 2013 5 5497 AM Local Disk C 495 6 GE 5 1 GE f i Switch to File view Archive File Details Name L
126. ctors from specified files navigate through the system metadata etc In order to edit view sectors of a hard disk partition you should take the following steps 1 Select a hard disk partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Edit View Sectors There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Gar Edit sectors on Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Current sector is 0 of 1 048 575 999 Please select sector number q T Te r q 5 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Oz00000000 Ox00000000 Oz00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Oz00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Oz00000000 Ox00000000 Oz00000000 Oz00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Ox00000000 Mee a a a a a N OOOddoo0 OOO00010 anoaz OOOO0030 OOOddo040 OOOOO0SO OOOO008O onoaiia OOOO008O anood OOOO00AO OOOO00BO onoaiia OOOdd0D0 OOOO00EO OOOO00FO OOO00100 OOO00110 OOO00120 OOO00130 OOO00140 OOOO01S0O OOO00160 OOOO01 O OOO001e8oO OOO00190 OOOO01AQ OOOO01BO ee 33 06 bd E had 7 26 TO Jt ja de 55 Aa O0 43 O0 53 6l 18 05 10 24 v4 20 be 67 65 a4 c bY fl 41 cl 66 68 a3 76 11 a2 75 23 th 50 66 66 68 al
127. ctory to specify location of program log files By default all logs are placed to C Program Files Paragon Software product s name program e Write logs in Bluescreen to enable the program logging in a special boot up mode e Stubact log file truncation to specify a storage life span for the stubact log file Infinite not to empty the file ever Minimal to have the file emptied all the time Custom to set a certain storage life span for the file Please note once the defined period has been expired the file will be emptied We strongly recommend you not to choose the Minimal option as in case of having 1 problems with the program our Support Team won t be able to study operation logs thus help you out Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 49 Operation dependency options B Operation dependency options Please select a task to be carmed out when one or more of the following operations are committed Perform the task Send e mail notification Operation Ww Adjust 05 to boot on new hardware W Adjust 05 to boot on virtual hardware ta Backup partition or disk ta Backup partitions or disks increment to virtual containers ta Backup partitions or disks to virtual containers W Boot record correction M Check file system W Compact MFT Convert Dynamic Disk to Basic ta Copy partition ta Copy partition by files to zip archive Select all Clear all Restore defaults
128. d DOS partitioning scheme and the new Dynamic Disk Management DDM The problem is that earlier versions of Windows do not support DDM In addition most hard disk utilities do not support it as well Recovery Media is a CD DVD disc a USB flash card or even a floppy disk from which you can boot for maintenance or recovery purposes Root Directory is the top level directory of a formatted logical drive to include other files and directories In modern file systems Ext2 Ext3 NTFS and even FAT32 it does not differ from other directories This is not the case for old FAT12 and FAT16 file systems Serial Number In the DOS partitioning scheme every hard disk and every partition has a 32 bit serial number represented by an 8 figure hexadecimal value It is stored in the MBR and its value is assigned when the MBR sector is initialized by Microsoft standard disk managing tools such as Windows Disk Administrator and the FDISK utility In fact a hard disk s serial number is not important for most operating systems and software It is known that Windows NT 2000 and XP store its value in the database of assigned drive letters A partition s serial number is stored in its boot sector in FAT16 FAT32 and NFTS file systems Its value is assigned when the partition is formatted It does not play an important role for most operating systems and software as well Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved
129. d Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dev FOO GB 18 7 MB zE Ho 1 G 10714 2013 2 20 15 Sh New Volurme F 499 9 GB 18 5 MB Mo 1 F 10714 2013 2 18 38 4M File level Archive 42 MB i J 10714 2013 2 18 19 AM File level Archive 4 2 MB 23 EB 1 T 10 9 2013 10 26 43 PM Local Disk C 499 6 GB 3 8 GB ZLE No 1 10 9 2013 10 26 07 PM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMivare Virtual S SCS Disk Dev FOO GB 14 4 MB Mo 1 To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in E New Yolume E im w Marne Size Date di AIC NEW 10716 2013 10 14 35 PM arc_new pbf 264 5 KE 10 16 2013 10 14 36 PM d arc_new pfi 22MB 10 16 2013 10 14 36 PM gt Jarc new _0100p 000 EMB 10 16 2013 10 14 24 FM gt a Jarc new _0100p pfm TERE 10 16 2013 10 14 24 PM gt Jarc new 0101p 000 1 2 MB 10 16 2013 10 14 26 PM gt a arc_new_O101p ptm 1 2 KB 10 16 2013 10 14 26 PM z Jarc new 0102p 000 20 6 MB 10 16 2013 10 14 32 PM Hla larc new _0102p pfm 4 1 KB 10 16 2013 10 14 31 PM Switch to Archive List Vie
130. d Disk Drive fol GB First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes ke Master Boot Record MBA 0 T 4 The size of objects to back up 280 3 GB Estimated archive size 48 3 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 6 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to local network drives option There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive C Save data to the Backup Capsule f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CO DVD or BD 7 Mapa network disk to place your backup image to Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location Cha AAO Oe E 4 F ah ate aA Ei Mame Size Date Samj My Computer Remote location mapping T Local Dis A network share B E Network Map to drive letter z Make permanent connection mos Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to it Definea letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Copyright 199
131. data OS together with all on disk data isn t the best choice but it s great for personal data like your documents email databases photos etc So let s see how to back up all office documents of the My Documents folder to an SFTP server 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe What to back up page select Documents to protect all office documents inside the My Documents folder Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 128 Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition i ae i mar E rriall Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats Scated In the My Documents folder Tene eeeeeeee eee Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 5 On the next page choose FTP Servers as backup storage Look in E Local Disk C a fel 4 F E Local Disk C F Local Disk F New Yolune G o pool eervers Y Kl i Dp F pool eervere 2
132. data with the minimal efforts possible With a unique intelligent work algorithm and a highly intuitive user interface you can easily back up exactly what you need the whole system e mail databases MS Outlook Express Windows Mail media files or office documents of the My Documents folder or any other files and folders Differential backup to a sector image to only archive changes since the last full sector based image thus considerably saving the backup storage space To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials Incremental backup to a sector image is a further way of optimizing the process of disk imaging Unlike differentials it may not only contain data changed since the time of creating a full sector based archive but one of its increments as well thus allowing to save more time and the backup storage Introduction of a special index file that stores backup meta information minimizes time and resources to create this type of archives Incremental backup to a file image to only archive changes since the last full or incremental file based image An incremental image is smaller and takes less time to create but you will require the initial full image and all of its increments to restore the latest point of this kind of backup File backup to a sector image It is a unique technology on the market so far that bridges two principally different approaches of the data backup the file based backu
133. dia CD1 linux 1 Select Image imedia CDL linus LMG D1 PBF 7 On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Partition preview NTFS Archive details A Type Image of the partition Archive path farc_091013125156058 arc_091013125156058 pbf Created 2013 Oct 9 Wed 12 52 57 File system NTFS Drive letter Volume label Size capacity 500 GB 536 501 813 248 Bytes Used space 10 5 GB 290 Free space 489 GB 9890 Sectors Cluster B a PE TEREE ee CIA faa al 8 On the next page specify a hard disk then one of its partitions to restore the image to if several in your computer By default the program offers to restore the archive exactly where it belongs That s what we actually need Basic Hard Disk 0 VMware Virtual 500 GB a O Basic Hard Disk O Model VMware Virtual Size 500 GB N Volume Type File System Size Volume label Active Hidden Primary 350 MB System Resen Yes Mo 1 Primary NTFS 280 GBE No label No No Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 163 1 All contents on the partition selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation On the Partition Start and Size page you can change size of the partition and its location if necessary Partition preview NTFS New size 10263 511649 MB wy 511649 MB Free s
134. disks and recorder Boot options Specity a bootable 150 image to place on CO OVO or BD along with backup data booted iso A The specified 150 image does not exist Specity how would you like to boot from CO OVD or BD Dio not boot from CO OVD or BD ISO image folder R Browse Please select a folder to place 150 images to when CD OVD of BD ISO maker is used This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during CD DVD BD burn operations Burn every CD DVD BD to the end By default the program does not create ISO 9660 compliant burning sessions as it processes data on the fly and can only estimate the resulted session size That s why no third party tool will get access to the recorded data To tackle the issue mark the checkbox to make the program create a standard Disk at Once session It may slow down the burning process as every CD DVD BD will be recorded up to the end no matter how much actual information to contain Recording speed The user may define how fast a CD DVD BD will be recorded minimum normal and maximum Besides there is an automatic mode when the program will set the most appropriate speed for every CD DVD BD Bootable ISO image That s the image to be placed together with the backup data By default the program offers its own bootable ISO image which contains a Linux DOS recovery environment However the user is free to use any bootable ISO image CD DVD BD boot
135. disks are not supported on Windows XP Home Edition based computers e You cannot create mirrored volumes or RAID 5 volumes on Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional or Windows XP 64 Bit Edition based computers Thus the dynamic disk is a new way of looking at hard disk configuration Dynamic disks offer you more management flexibility without the partition limitation of basic disks Dynamic disks can contain an unlimited number of volumes but they cannot contain partitions or logical drives Dynamic storage can be particularly beneficial for large scale businesses when dealing with many physical hard disks involving complex setup GPT versus MBR GUID Partition Table GPT is the next generation of a hard disk partitioning scheme developed to lift restrictions of the old MBR Being a part of the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI standard proposed by Intel to replace the outdated PC BIOS it offers a number of crucial benefits e Upto 128 primary partitions for the Windows implementation only 4 in MBR e The maximum allowed partition size is 18 exabytes only 2 terabytes in MBR e More reliable thanks to replication and cyclic redundancy check CRC protection of the partition table e A well defined and fully self identifying partition format data critical to the platform operation is located in partitions but not in un partitioned or hidden sectors as this is the case with MBR uEFI Boot Challenges Introduced back in 2005 by In
136. drives by clicking the appropriate buttons Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter File Backup Restore e Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 59 Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want bo restore from Name Type 5ize a FE Archive File Level Archive Fo9 5 KE 603 660 Bytes HM eee Ec ES ac 091013140825801 eM are_091013140825801 pf File 576 KB fee arc 091013140825901 pin File 1 5 KB To continue click Next Data size to restore 569 5 KB e A place to restore From the pull down list you can choose whether to restore contents of the backup image to its original location or specify some other one Restore files to Original location The files and folg Original location b he place where they were archived from Specific folder When restoring MES ma arean Gait On Your computer f Leave existing files IF a file exists in the original location it won t be overwritten Only missing deleted files will be restored from backup C Replace existing files ALL selected files will be replaced with files from backup Besides if you select the Original location option you can additionally define wh
137. e correct it by using the appropriate buttons Edit the Boot ini file on Hard Disk 0 Partition 0 boot loader timeout 30 default multi Odisk O rdiskiO partition WINDOWS operating systems multiMdiskiMrdiskiM partition WwiINDOWS Microsoft Windows XP Professional noexecute Copy Irizari Arle Delete Edit Insert the sample Add the sample 7 Ifthe Boot ini file does not contain any mistake please return to the Correct Windows Installations page to correct drive letters in the Windows System Registry Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 186 Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installations on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status 5 refers to a system parition you can edit the Boot ini file B a boot partition you can correct the System Registry No Partition Status Root System 1 DiskO PartitionO S B WINDOWS WinXP For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation to perform Properties _ Edit the Boot ini file Correct drive letters in the System Registry _ Correct partition boot record _ Adjust OS to boot on new hardware To continue click Next 8 Onthe next page choose a hard disk from the pull down list if several then the required partition If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item
138. e Change backup settings option Apart Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 113 from the desired virtual container type you can modify other backup parameters Please consult the Settings Overview section for more information Advanced backup settings VD container options fo a a TE cis sa ia Wx VD container options Copy Backup exclude options Password protection Unknown partitions policy Ask user Specify how to process each unknown or unformatted partition skip it from backup or backup in sector by sector mode Note this option requires confirmation for each unknown or unformatted partition during the operation Virtual container type Paragon Image pvhd ha Paragon Image pvhd VMWare Image vmdk MS Virtual PC Image vhd Microsoft Hyper V Image whch 5 Specify location of the resulted image in the Backup destination section If you d like to save it locally either enter a full path to the target folder in the corresponding field or use the Browse button to find it Backup destination Backup location C AUsers Administrators Desktop t Available space 10 GB If you re going to save the backup image on a network share or a physical partition a partition that doesn t have a drive letter in the system click on the Browse button In the opened dialog you can see several options Look in Local Disk C E amp p Address C Users
139. e YD Archive Synthetic Backup Incremental File Backup Restore File From Archive Unmount Archive Convert to Virtual Machine Differential Backup Create File Complement Archives database Manage archives Mount options af Apply x Discard View Changes bry Undo Redo amp Reload Disk Info Generate Script C4 Save to Scheduler Express Mode YD Archive of NTFS Volume New Volume al Sie Se Basic data partition 30 E Boot E Recovery E5 System Volume Information Source Object Size 53GB Archive Size 1 ME Creation Date 10 17 2013 3 12 08 AFl no Comments Increment 1 Chain 2 bootmar 417 6 Flags gs Increment Differential E BOOTNT 1 By Compressed z BOOTSECT BAK 9 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 750 I gt BSshow vo containers E Show partitions amp amp E Ek Type Creation Date Source Object Size Archive Size Flags Comment Mounted amp 10 17 2013 31208 AM New Volume 5 3 GE IMB 3 Increment 1 Chain 2 E 10 17 2013 3 08 48 AM Local Disk 44 1 GE 279MB 8 3 Increment 2 amp 10 17 2013 2 02 14 AM Local Disk 44 1 GB 279MB 0 3 Increment 1 amp 10716 2013 8 41 21 PM Recovery 22r MB 47GB zE Backup image 20131015 1639 E 10 16 2013 8 41 21 PM New Volume p3 GE 47GB m Backup_image_20131015_ 1639 E 10 16 2073 8 41 21 PM Local Disk 44 1 GE 47GB Backup_image_20131015_ 16349 E 10 16 2013 8 41 21 PM NO MAME 100 ME 47GB a Backup_image_20131015_1639 amp 10 16 2013 8 41 21 P
140. e available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Restoring Hard Disk 1 All contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Your hard disk after the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Unallocated i I Be Hard Disk Restore Options Copp data and resize partitions proportionally In this mode the Wizard changes the size of partitions in the same proportion with keeping intact their relative order This option can be useful in restoring an image of hard disk to a larger one Perform surface test Set this option if you want the Wizard to perform the surface test on the target hard disk In this case if the program finds bad and unreliable sectors it will mark them as unusable ones e Copy data and resize partitions proportionally If this option is activated the program proportionally changes the size of partitions keeping their relative order intact The option can be useful when restoring to a larger hard disk e Perform surface test Define whether the surface test will be accomplished during the operation or not e Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operati
141. e computer 3 Restart the computer 4 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since it s the only mode that enables to work with USB devices By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 5 Inthe Linux launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard 6 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 171 7 On the What to Restore page click the standard browse button to find the required archive When done double click on it to select Look in se 3 arc_101013062156703 hiw arc_091013131559760 pbt File name arc_091013131559760 pbf File type Archive files pbf W Cancel Help Fl Cancel 8 On the Image Properties page make sure that you select the correct image by viewing the provided information about the archive Disk preview Volume Type File System Sze Used volmelabel Basic Hard Disk 3 Size 120 GB Primary NTFS 14 3 GB 164MB New Volume Primary NTFS 8 4 GB 8 5 MB New Volume w w Archive details Type image of the hard disk Archive path imntdisk sdb2 Img_D3 pbf Created 2013 Oct 10 Thd 04 49 39 To continue restore process click Next 9 On the next page specify a hard disk to restore the image to Basic Hard Disk 2 VMware Virtual 750 GB Basic Hard Disk 3 VMware Virtual 120 GB Basic
142. e installation list Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Secondary IDE Channel ginntinn mehde int gwinn mehde int Intel R 82371AB7EB PCI Bus Master IDE Controller ginntinn mehde int YHware SCSI Controller eas pone L mE PIER mE Migrating a Windows 7 vhd Let s assume you need to make your Windows 7 contained in a vhd file start up on another computer You ve copied the virtual disk added info on it to the BCD boot menu then tried to start up the OS but to no avail your Windows goes BSOD with the 0x000007B error code We can help you out with this naughty problem Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 203 To make a vhd image of Windows 7 start up on different hardware please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE media 2 Complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Extra Scenarios for WinPE Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image Adding specific drivers The WinPE based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support Anyway you ve got the option to add drivers for specific hardware with a handy dialog To add drivers for specific hardware please do the following 1 Click Load Drivers 2 Inthe opened dialog browse for an INF file of the required driver package located on a floppy disk local disk CD DVD or a network share Then click t
143. e is selected the PTS DOS launch menu appears It has nearly the same functionality as for the Normal mode except for the Network Configurator and Log Saver commands Besides due to certain limitations of the PTS DOS environment there is no possibility to burn CD DVD discs Low Graphics Safe Mode When the Low Graphics mode is selected the PTS DOS launch menu appears It has the same functionality and looks similar to the Safe mode but graphically simpler Backup amp Recovery 15 You can create delete and Backup Wizard format hard disk partitions Simple Restore Wizard using this program which Ba File Transfer Wizard will start now IE Boot Corrector Upon the start please elect the drive and one of W Start the command line its partitions or its free S Reboot the computer space Then activate the Partition pull down menu and select one of the partitioning operations Booting from the WinPE Recovery Media The WinPE recovery environment can be a real alternative to the Linux DOS recovery environment Providing nearly the same level of functionality it offers an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version does Startup To start working with the WinPE recovery environment please take the following steps 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image
144. e lost as a result of its malfunction So how this tragedy can be prevented File Backup versus Sector Backup Since the advent of the computer age people were in the search of ways to guarantee data safety As a result we ve got now two principal approaches the file based backup and the sector based backup The main difference between the two lies in the way data is treated A sector based backup operates with an image or a snapshot of the whole disk system or its separate partitions It not only includes the contents of all user made files but additionally contains the exact structure of directories information Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 19 about file allocation file attributes and other related data Thus it enables to successfully process system or encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain In contrast a file based backup takes into account a file system structure and only functions on a file or folder level So it is very efficient when archiving separate files or folders but in no way will help you back up a system partition You should understand pretty well that each of the two approaches is only good when properly chosen In the comparison table below you can see when this or that approach will suit you at most Sector Based Backup File Based Backup Merits It does not dependent on a particular file system Thus it can s
145. e slowest of all three but it can guarantee increments will only contain changed new data 6 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later Back up now Back up the specited objects to a virtual disk container after completing the wizard Generate script Create a script to back up the specited objects later 7 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes After the operation is completed you receive an incremental update to the selected backup image placed next to the base image Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 112 Backing up individual files and folders To back up required files or folders to a virtual container please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Backup to VD There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select Back up files to create a file level virtual container Please note that this mode won t help you to restore an operating system Flease select the backup mode Back Up yolumes Back up the specited volumes to a virtual disk container Back up
146. e sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch the P2P Adjust OS Wizard The WinPE based environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard disks will be unavailable Please consult the Adding specific drivers scenario to know how to tackle this issue 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 From the list of all found Windows systems if several select one you need to adjust to the new hardware If you re willing to adjust them all just re launch this wizard for each Local Disk C No label 20GB Se Mooi Windows XB Local Dek C Nolte 20GB 5 There are two execution modes to choose from fully automatic and advance Below we will go set by step through the automatic scenario to show the whole process and then take a closer look at specifics of the advance scenario ron Adjust the OS to the new hardware aut patically Perform the OS adjustment in automatic mode The wizard will automatically set parameters and inject drivers 2 Set parameters for the OS adjustment Y Perform the OS adjustment in advanced mode You will be able to manually set parameters and inject drivers 6 Select Adjust the OS to the new hardware automatically Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 197 7 The wizard will automatically accomplish all the necessary actions Pro
147. e virtual mode e Allow virtual mode Mark the checkbox to enable the virtual mode It is an effective way of protection from any troubles since no operation will be executed until confirmation thus giving you a second chance to weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation 1 We strongly recommend you to enable this mode e Close progress dialog automatically Mark the checkbox to automatically close the progress dialog after accomplishing operations Backup Section Backup image options Backup Image options W Control archive integrity Choose this option to allow writing of specific data that will later be used during restore to check the archive integrity It can slow down the backup operation W Set image file names automatically Choose this option to automatically name files in complex archive Compression level Normal compression r Good compression Provides average speed with the reasonable image size Image split Enable image splitting Choose this option to enable splitting the archive to several files Maxinnurn split size MB This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during backup restore operations e Control archive integrity Mark the checkbox to guarantee that all backup images created with the program are 100 percent flawless If you decided not to control the archive integrity the backup operation would take about 3 5 less time e Set image
148. ect please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 5 Onthe What folders and files to back up page you can see contents of the selected partition archive Mark a checkbox opposite a file or folder to build up contents of the future incremental image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 143 Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want to back up Mame Size Date an H ac 091013140825801 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM f arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM f arc 101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 Pe arc 101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM f arc 101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM f arc 101013091716250 10 10 2013 2 17 49 AM PerfLogs 6 22 9019 8 22 35 AM Program Files 10 9 2013 5 50 43 AM Program Files 86 1079 2013 11 01 16 PM a ProgramData 10 9 2013 11 01 18 PM E di System Volume Information 1049 2073 6 17 05 AM Users 9 3 2019 2 48 22 PM E Administrator 10 9 2013 10 26 37 Pe Default 6 22 2013 12 11 25 Pe AppData 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM Desktop 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM le PRC ocuments 6 22 9013 7 45 52 AM Downloads 6 22 2019 8 36 30 AM Favorites 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM Links 6 22 2013 8 36 30 AM Music 6 22 2019 8 36 30 AM f Pictures 8 22 2013 8 36 304M 6 Specify include masks The program includes a lot of ready made filters to effectively control contents of your backup i
149. ected image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 157 Specity a base image for an increment Look in E Backup Storage E Ehl 4 Mame Size Date di Backup HDDO_20140901_0453 9 4 2014 1 42 45 4M a di inc 101 9 17 2014 5 25 41 AM 2 48KB 9 1 2014 5 25 41 AM He ine 212 9 4 2014 1 41 36 M T Files of type VD Container files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Hame File increment 1 Comment Increment 1 File E Backup_HDDO_20140901_04537inc_1_0_1 inc_1 ph Type Incremental YD Container Parent E Backup_ HDDO_20140901_0453 Backup_HDDO_20140901_0453 ph Creation date 97 1 2014 5 25 41 AM View YD container detailed structure Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 5 Select Restore files and folders What objects would you like to restore Restore disk or partitian Select disk or partitions from virtual container to restore to selected target disk partition or Unallocated space Restore files and folders Select files and folders to restore them to original location or specific folder peek Decale enue a nena 6 On the next page specify what you need to extract from the backup by marking checkboxes next to the required data items At the right lower corner of the window you can see the resulted amount of the selected data Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved
150. ed g Properties 493 9 GE Basic HBR Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Dey m k aa UUU Basic MBR Hard Disk a Virtual S oe SCSI Disk Dev 749 9GB Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 Mware YMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Status Online Unallocated Total size 500 GB 119 9 GB Disk and Partitions List Sectors per track 63 Heads 255 Cylinders 65270 ci Status Bar Disk and partitions list i No changes a Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 31 Tool Button Ribbon Panel Set View Button Virtual Operations Bar Express Mode Button Disk Map Disk and Partitions List Context sensitive Menu O CO N OA Ww A WW N e Properties Panel 10 Status Bar A number of panels offer similar functionality with a synchronized layout The program enables to conceal some of them to simplify the interface management Tool Button By clicking on this button the user can e Launch auxiliary wizards e Get access to the program settings e Collect and send a log files package to the Support Team e Goto Paragon s website to download a free update register the product visit Paragon s Knowledge Base etc Ribbon Panel An area across the top of the program s window is called the Ribbon Panel It makes almost all the product capabilities available to the user in a single place A Ribbon Tab is an area on the panel
151. ed to provide the copy backup infrastructure for the Microsoft Windows XP Vista Server 2003 2008 operating systems It offers a reliable mechanism to create consistent point in time copies of data known as shadow copies Developed by Microsoft in close cooperation with the leading copy backup solution vendors on the market it is based on a snapshot technology concept Initiated by a VSS aware copy backup utility VSS creates snapshots for the selected volumes and represents them as virtual read only devices called volume shadow copies Once the shadow copies are created the copy backup utility starts processing the data while applications keep writing to original volumes Unlike Paragon Hot Processing the VSS technology provides a unique possibility to make a synchronous snapshot of multiple volumes This very feature can be particularly beneficial when backing up active SQL Server 2003 Exchange 2003 or Oracle databases located on multiple volumes the way it is recommended by Microsoft to improve the level of database performance and reliability thus providing 100 percent data consistency To use VSS it is necessary to have a mounted 300 MB NTFS partition pVHD Support Paragon introduces a pVHD Paragon Virtual Hard Drive format a special VHD optimized for storing backups of virtual and physical machines It s very efficient in handling incremental chains data de duplication and synchronization pVHD allows obtaining backups that
152. eep several restore points of the required data with the minimal load on the backup storage 8 Seta timetable for the operation and a number of additional parameters Backup series schedule Task name Cyclic Backup to virtual container of 4 objecta Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task Once W Do not reboot if itis required Shutdown system after backup Run the task at 01 1 620144 03 15 4M Specity User name and password By clicking the Specify user name and password link you can define whether to allow the program to do backups under the current user a backup task will only start if this user is logged on or provide credentials name and password of a particular user recommended as a backup task will be able to start no matter what user is logged on if any S Please enter the name and password of a user account which will be used to carry out the task Run under the specified user The task will run only if this user is logged on User wE30went6dengAdministrator f Use the specified username and password The task will run notwithstanding what user if any i logged on Note the progress dialog might not be visible User WE s0Wentbh4eng administrator Password i To know more on the subject please consult the Task Scheduling chapter 9 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes The operation will run according to the set
153. el then select Create Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Dialog Startup 1 Select a block of free space on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Create Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Express Create Partition Wizard Setup Thanks to a highly intelligent work algorithm the wizard requires minimal involvement in the operation thus you only need to choose a method you find the most suitable to create the partition if several available which actually differ in the amount of space to allocate For easy perception you can see the resulted disk layout on the disk map by selecting this or that mode The result you wall get after applving the changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev f Local Disk C 3ra GB NTFS Please select the method of new partition creation C Smart Mode Use 105 3 GB to create a partition More into The number of available methods depends on your disk layout To learn more on the way the wizard works please click the corresponding link on the first page of the wizard Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 68 Create Partition Wizard Setup The wizard offers t
154. em Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection on a bootable recovery media either to save a backup of a partition hard disk or just several files on a network computer or retrieve a previously made backup from a network computer for recovery purposes Boot Corrector to fix most of the system boot problems that can be a result of a human factor program error or a boot virus activity i Boot Corrector is only available for the bootable recovery environment Supported Technologies Along with using innovative technologies from outside Paragon has developed a number of its own original technologies that make its products unique and attractive for customers Paragon Hot Backup technology to back up locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements Paragon Hot Copy technology to copy locked partitions and hard disks under Windows NT family operating systems providing both high operating efficiency as well as low hardware requirements Paragon Adaptive Restore technology to successfully migrate a Windows physical system to a different hardware platform P2P Paragon Power Shield technology to provide data consistency in case of a hardware malfunction power outages or an operating system failure Paragon UFSD technology to browse partitions of any file system including hidden and unmounted modify and
155. eps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Assign Drive Letter There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Specify a drive letter for the selected partition Initially the program suggests some consistent value for this parameter So you may just press the Yes button to confirm the operation y Assign a drive letter as This allows access to the volume by using the drive letter assigned The assignment Is Mok recommended if the volume contains a file system not supported by your operating system Assign the following drive letter hi Mo However you can manually define the required letter by selecting it from the pull down list of available drive letters 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Remove Drive Letter In order to un mount a partition you should take the following steps Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 94 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Remove Drive Letter There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Modifying drive letter of the sys
156. er Restoring a file increment Let s assume that you re busy with developing some project and you make file increments of it on a day to day basis not to lose valuable information So you ve got a file backup chain One day you understand that the job of the last three days is a complete and utter failure Don t give up recover your project to the state when everything s ok To restore a file increment please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 173 There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Onthe Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp Ee Ek 10710 2013 6 55 45 AM File level Archive 24 KB 10710 2013 6 54 26 AM File level Archive r1 93 ME 10710 2013 6 48 07 AM File level Archive r1 3 ME 10710 2013 2 17 49 AM New Yolume G 14 2 GE 10710 2013 2 1719 AM New Wolume G 14 2 GE 1079 2013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 477 GE 1079 2013 11 22 19 PM File level Archive 24 KB 1079 2013 11 17 38 PM File level Archive 509 5 KE 1079 2013 11 15 18 PM File l
157. ers of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive To back up a dual boot Mac Mac OS X and Windows XP Vista 7 8 and then place the resulted image to an external USB drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Connect an external USB drive to the computer 3 Restart the computer It will be automatically started up into the Linux recovery environment Normal Mode since it s the only mode that provides support for Mac computers 4 Inthe Linux launch menu select Backup amp Recovery 5 Launch the Backup Wizard by selecting in the Main Menu of the program Wizards gt Backup Wizard Partition Help d Disko VM Copy Hard Disk E One Button Copy Wizard Restore Wizard Simple Backup Restore d Disk 1 VM Backup to VD Wizard Incremental Backup to YD Wizard Restore from VD Wizard d Disk 2 WM Undelete Partitions Wipe Wizard dDisk3 VM Express Resize Wizard i J Split Partition Wizard File Transfer Wizard Disko Boo
158. es add delete mount etc Oo This feature is only available for the Windows installation of the program Available location for backup images Backup to local mounted partitions Backup to local unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Backup to an external mounted storage to provide for a higher level of data protection and system independence Backup to a special secured place on the hard disk called the Backup Capsule that has an independent system layout e g a separate partition and will stay operable should the active file system be damaged To avoid an accidental removing or unauthorized access of the backup data this partition is hidden and thus cannot be mounted in the operating system Backup to external media CD DVD to guarantee a high level of data protection as long as the backup media is kept secure Backup to a network drive to stand a better chance of success in case of a hard disk failure Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 8 Backup to an FTP SFTP server to provide a new level of system and data protection Bootable Backup Capsule to get the choice to launch the Linux or PTS DOS recovery environment every time you start up the computer With its help you will be able to run utilities under Linux or PTS DOS and that way to get access to your hard disk for maintenance or recovery purposes For PBF images Smart Backup Wizard to secure system and
159. essing the appropriate button 13 Turn off the computer This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD To retrieve valuable information from your hard disk and burn it to CD DVD when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image i To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment since it s the only mode that enables to burn CD DVD discs Oo By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 190 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source Ci Ext4FS 1 on Disk 1 NEWYVOLUME Y My computer wf Root dir i iMyComputer My computer Ka imnt Mounted resources i imntdisk Local disks i imedia Removable disks cs IDE CD DVD NECVMWa VMware IDE a C Ext4FS
160. ether to replace already existing files during the restore operation good for recovering presumably corrupted files or leave them intact good for recovering accidentally deleted files Sector Backup Restore e Data to restore You ve got the option to restore not only the entire archive but separate items of it the so called selective restore functionality by marking checkboxes next to the data items you need Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 60 Please select one of the objectis to restore Name Type File system Size Used gt Eee E eae ce maces Internal Hard Disk Drive 120 GB GRNew Volume Li Primary NTFS 14 2 GB 163 8 MB ES NEW VOLUME E Primary Linus Este 6 3GB 281 9 MB NEW VOLUME H Primary FATTE OMB O Bytes rae GGiNEw VOLUME l Primary FAT 32 5 8 GB 4 KE Archive Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Dis Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 120 GE To select where to restore the selected objectis click Next Data size to restore 120 GE i If you select separate files or folders to restore the wizard will continue working as though you ve got to do with a file backup e A place to restore Selecting the destination please note all contents on the disk selected for restoring purposes will be deleted during the operation Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev a w Local Disk C
161. evel Archive 293 5 MB 1079 2013 11 09 02 PM File level Archive 24 KB 1079 2013 7 08 28 AM NEW VOLUME 350 MB 1079 2013 7 08 20 AM Local Disk JME 1079 2013 6 38 00 AM Mew Wolume E 10 9 GE 309 Bytes 309 Bytes 4 9 KB 165 5 MB 309 Bytes 1 8 MB 30 8 KB 4 7 MB a AO A DO Do d p F 5 5 G p F p F E 5 G Du Switch to File view Archive File Details 24 KB 24 576 Bytes Archive size 389 Bytes Total size Backup date 10 10 2073 6 55 43 4M Comment Mo comment is available File Ce farc_09701737 4067 75574 farchive phi Base archive 087 7551 arc_10107 3060839749 F LOOOO00000000000000 archive phi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 174 Lookin E LocalDisk C 0 A SH Mame Size Date 2 2 E Local Disk C E arc 091013125156058 10 9 2013 11 17 27 PM arc 091013131559760 10 9 2013 10 37 14 PM arc 091013133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM arc_091013140817551 10 9 2013 11 08 51 PM arc
162. evice i This scenario implies that you have got a bootable archive on your CD DVD In case the backup image is stored on several CD DVD disks please insert the first one 2 Restart the computer 3 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 162 incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period In the PTS DOS launch menu select the Simple Restore Wizard You can find the same wizard in Linux as well On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button On the What to Restore page you can see a list of available images if several Most likely the required archive will be there too If not click the standard browse button to find it When you find your image double click on it to proceed Please select the file with partition or hard disk image You can select image from list below on Double click Created on Type Archive path 2013 Oct14 11 48 28 Partition ime
163. ew Volume E MR 478 4 GB NTFS Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 21 fel 10535 MB 21721 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition E OME Please specify size of free space after the partition U 0MB Partition Restore Options 9 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a file to execute it later What would you like to da Restore now Restore specified objects after completing the wizard t Generate script Create a script to restore the specified objects later 10 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Mark the checkbox at the bottom of the window to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the restore operation 12 After completing the operation please reboot the computer To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring individual files and folders 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on i CD DVD flash or in an ISO image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved
164. file names automatically Mark the checkbox to make the program automatically set a file name for every volume of a complex backup image Otherwise you will need to do it manually during the backup operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 39 e Compression level From the pull down list you can select the desired compression level for backup images that will be used by default e Enable image splitting Mark the checkbox to automatically split every backup image to volumes of a particular size QO Splitting images enables to tackle problems caused by a maximum file size limitation of some file systems e Maximum split size With the spinner control you can specify a maximum size for backup volumes General copy and backup options fe General copy and backup options HOD raw processing Copy an entire hard disk sector by sector without taking into account its partition structure Partition raw processing Copw Backup each partition sector by sector All sectors will be processed one by one even Unused sectors Requires more time to complete the operation W Skip archive files stored in archive library Choose this option to skip archive files stored in archive library This will reduce operation time and backup image size W Automatic BCO update Add Boot entry for target partition to BCD hive on copy restore source partition This section contains a set of options that will be
165. files Back up the specited files to a virtual disk container 4 On the next page you can see a list of all partitions both mounted and unmounted available in the system Mark a checkbox opposite a file folder or even a whole partition to build up contents of the future backup image Select files to back up Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want to back up Mame Size Date Zi This Computer e a F Local Disk C di Recycle Bin 9 3 2073 1 58 28 PM di PerfLogs o 22 201 9 22 35 4M E di Program Files of F201 4 2 28 09 4M EE di Program Files 86 9 3 2013 204174 PM ProgramData 6 27 2014 7 28 39 AM System Volume Information 4117 2014 3 45 49 AM ap Users 9 3 2013 1 57 44 PM aM di Administrator 9 8201 4 1 11 20 AM AppData 9 3 2013 1 57 45 PM oe di Contacts 9 3201 3 1 58 00 FM di Desktop 9 8 2014 1 07 12 4M mi Documents 9 3 2073 1 58 00 PM i Downloads 9 3 2073 1 58 00 PM i di Favorites 9 3 2073 1 58 00 PM E di Links 9 3 2073 1 58 01 PM E m Music 9 3 2073 1 58 00 PM f Pictures 9 3 2013 1 58 00 PM E di Saved Games 9 3201 3 1 58 00 FM a Wre md or kd Change backup settings Note This option is recommended for advanced users only By default the wizard is configured to back up to pVHD Paragon Virtual Hard Drive If you d like to switch the resulted virtual container to VHD VHDX or VMDK additionally mark th
166. from the WinPE recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch Boot Corrector 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select Correct EFI parameters to specify the required bootable device in the EFI boot entry Windows installation to comect View the list of all windows installations and corect boot parameters Corect the Master Boot Record MBR View the list of all Hard Disks and comect MBR executable code on some of them Edit View Sectors View edit backup and restore sectors or a group of sectors on the hard disk or partition of your choice Corect boot parameters boot ini BCD Automatically corect boot ini and BCD on all hard disks in system Tri ap heene Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 183 The option above will be available for the user only if the operation is accomplished through the 64 bit WinPE media The wizard will detect and list all available GPT partitions that accommodate 64 bit Windows OS Choose the one you need to boot from to let the wizard modify the EFI boot entry correspondingly The wizard has searched your computer for valid Windows installations You can see results of the operation below Note The status System sta
167. g Individual Files and FolderS ccceeeeeceeeecccccccceceeeceeeeeeeseseeeececcccsscseeeeeeueueesnssseeeeeeeceseseeeeeeeeaaaegs 187 System Migration SCONANIOS sissicaccscvscorsissieseuseuesanseebuessaseesdseveesdesawaanetentwebeennstguesenreeatesnaeaensontecheeonsssancaaseuse 194 Migrating system to a new HDD up tO 2 2TB in SIZE essssssssssesssssrrrsessrrrresssrrrresssrrresssrteressrtrressrtreesssteresssetreessereresseeeree 194 Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS ccccccccsssccccccesseecccseeeeeccccseeeseeceeeeeeseceesseeeecceseueenseess 196 Migrating a Windows 7 VING crose a S 202 Extra Scenarios Tor WINPE sccis a a a a a a a A sauce sc soucxeenebeecexesnace 203 Adding specie drivers reisean NO 203 COMMUN INE HECWON e E a a a a 204 Savine JOS ESAn a r r A 207 How to Work with Bitlocked Volumes ccsscssccsccsscssccsccescesccscceccescessassceccescessasscescescssesscessessssonsoesees 208 Wis V WANING OWNS aona a E a a a ieag oo aan cme aneuatne noeag ste neeaaanecatoouestne 208 Nate WWTINIP IE resene e a te cnane tiled tele aetatil tetnt aioe a ates nated E alld tikatariaey E 210 TEOUDICSH OO CE ranar E E E 212 GNSS AU incs a E ico ta nace ae cect E 213 Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Introduction Paragon Backup amp Recovery 15 Home is a complex disaster recovery solution By including into this product the brand new disk imaging technology that allows ba
168. ghts reserved 198 There are no drivers for the following devices VMware SCSI Controller a nen 23r 1AB EB PCI Bus Master IDE Controller 8 Primary IDE Channel 8 Secondary IDE Channel Tou have chosen ta ignore these devices and continue with the OS adjustment Your A 05 will not start up on the new hardware if there are no drivers for boot critical devices Are pou ure you want to continue 10 The wizard can search for drivers on a local disk or a mapped network share In our case it s on a network share this is why we need to map it first Please specify an additional path to the missing drivers Add a folder to the drivers source list l F Floppy Disk Drive A J E Local Disk C Pserver pool Driver Repository Map to drive letter B P Make pemanent connection Windows Security i x Enter Network Password Enter your password to connect to server Lite gf Domain 7 32 ENTERPRIZE E Remember my credentials 9 Access is denied 11 When done we can select it as target Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Disk Drives i m Hoppy Disk Drive A H Local Disk C A H ECD Drive D Network Places H Local Disk E Ee E Driver Directory SRV437 Z Please specify an additional path to the missing drivers Oo The wizard enables to specify several driver repositories 12 If the wiza
169. gs H E FertLogs H E Program Files E Frogram Files x86 E FrogramD ata T B System Volume Information m 1E indows j Name Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 Paragon virtual image Yirtual Image Type Virtual Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GB Archive Details 5 Edit the default description to the created incremental image if necessary Incremental image properties Comment Increment 4 6 Choose whether to execute the operation immediately after finishing the wizard and applying the pending changes only if the virtual mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later What would you like to da Backup now Back up the specitted objects to a virtual disk container after completing the wizard Generate script Create a script to back up the specitted objects later 7 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes i This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Automating regular backup routine The program includes an efficient tool that helps to set up unattended backup operations involving regular creation of full and incremental images controlled by special backup data retention policies This tool is fully compliant with the so called set and forget backup strategies To automate regular backup routine please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select VD Retention Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Soft
170. he Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 On the Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe What to back up page select Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition PPE EEE EEL ELLE LEE LLL CLEC LLL LLL LLL LLC LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLC LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL E rriall Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder d Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder P Cther Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 5 Onthe next page mark the appropriate option opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 124 Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition you want to back up Name Type File system Size tee e E My Computer My Computer iv Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive n00 GB E First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes a
171. he Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Create Delete Partition Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition to delete Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then the required partition to delete On this page you can choose a volume you would like to delete Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l A Unallocated 115 8 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i o Local Disk 749 9 GE NTFS A Tou are about to destroy a partition All data on this partition will be lost 1 As a result of this operation contents of the selected partition will be lost e Merge free blocks As a result of the operation you may get several blocks of the unallocated space on the hard disk So choose whether to merge them all and place at the beginning of the disk or at the end by selecting the required operation from the pull down list Merge free blocks options Do not merge free blocks j T Merge free blocks at the end of the disk Do not merge tree blocks Merge free blocks at the beginning of the disk Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests you just to remove references to the selected partition from
172. he Open button to initiate the operation lookin Tinie j IX g Disk Drives ai E Local Disk C E p archive_db 8 7 2013 11 57 39 PM Fl Drivers 8 7 2013 11 13 10 PM oo is Tenlicuilg 94KB 9 19 2003 5 44 10 AM Network Places 2 2 hae ae Oemsetup inf OO 640 Bytes 10 17 2002 7 28 08 AM Ge ImageStorage 8 7 2013 10 49 00 PM H p PerfLogs 7 13 2009 7 20 08 PM H Program Files 8 7 2013 10 34 18 PM E p Program Files 86 8 7 2013 10 29 10 PM Hl Users 6 26 2013 5 29 22 AM Ee pd Windows 8 7 2013 11 05 06 PM H CD Drive D CD_ROM E Boot X File name NETD LKRT INF Files of type Inf Files Oo To know how to map a network share please consult the Configuring network scenario Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 204 3 You will be notified on the successful accomplishment of the operation Click Yes to load another driver or No to close the dialog Driver c driversinetdlkrtint has been loaded successfully Would you like to load another driver s Oo The WinPE recovery environment can either be 32 or 64 bit so are to be drivers for injection Configuring network If your local network has a DHCP server a network connection will be automatically configured once the WinPE recovery environment has been started up Otherwise you will need to do it manually with a handy dialog by providing an IP address a network mask default gateway etc Bes
173. he Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the archive f Save data to local network drives f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CD OVO or BD 8 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name jarc_051 013135006539 Estimated archive size 5 5 GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space Oo available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space delete outdated backups from the Backup Capsule or resize it with the Manage Backup Capsule Wizard 9 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 123 Please enter a short comment to describe the archive E Ry No comment 10 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD To back up an entire hard disk or a separate partition and then burn the resulted image to CD DVD please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click t
174. he following steps to accomplish the operation e Partition destination Select a hard disk if the computer has several hard disks and then choose position for the future partition on the disk at the end preferable at the beginning or somewhere in the middle between other partitions On this page vou can select hard disk and the place where to create a new partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware dware Yirtual 5 SCS Disk Dev 119 8 GB Basic The partition will be created here ware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i Local Disk f49 9 GB NTFS E Use the buttons to mowe the marker or drag marker by mouse 4 new partition will be AL created where the marker ts By default the program allows you to create a new partition only as the last primary or as a the last logical drive within the extended partition However by activating the advance mode on the first page of the wizard you can remove this restriction that in its turn might result in some boot problems e Partition size There is no restriction on size of the future partition merely depending on space available on the hard disk If there is not enough free space in one block the wizard enables to redistribute free space joining all free space blocks together into one united block and moving partitions when necessary If the total amount of free
175. he section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in E Local Disk C me x g Name Size Date J di Contacts 9 3 2073 2 25 02 FM di Desktop 1271972013 11 53 17 PM e Backup 2 part 12 19 2013 11 53 53 PM Se MM Sackup HDD1_20131219_2346 12 19 2013 11 46 43 PM j Backup HOD1_20131219_2346 pfi 48 EB 12 19 2013 11 46 43 PM PoP EE hdd 0 pvhd J12 KB 12719 2013 11 46 43 PM Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Backup H D 1_20131219_2346 Comment Backup image 20131219 2546 File C Users AdministratorDesktop Backup HDD 20131219_ 2346 ph Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 12 19 2013 11 46 43 PM Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Result 99 Revision of archive s structure By clicking Next for the selected virtual container you can see its properties ina bright graphical form To initiate verification please click Next one more time Archive s structure Name Type File system Size Used Backup _HDOO_ 201 31219_23 YD Archive 1853 8 MB 192 815 104 Bytes aA e a E ie virtual Hard Disk Drive SOO GE H E System Reserved P
176. hiea an aaedeek 57 CODY TASKS neninn a A E a 62 Onne Tr OIG 5 asa a N E E E cennseesuacastem toast 62 CONO MIU LN ese E T E ES 65 Partition Manage mMmeNi emain ina aE Aa NN E 66 Basic Partitioning OPEratONS sicrie a N aia 66 Advanced Partitioning Operations ncsainie a BUA ee A A re T A 75 Chancen PAIL O MAEMO US racic ti she tastes acaba Sead ees bce ee a ease cea eee eer ee eee 77 Hard Disk Management ocorren a a cea eaistutiial ei eewbsesunseia assed nea eee eee 80 Converting Dynamic MBR tO Basic siiscciticectadincsserssiassieguaacneuteasuerabuaatectoseewsaguacunetaadepianuaarsaesaneaaiagudanaaauseussenueeramneueenuates 80 Converting GPT TO sR asic MB Ris cesta crs iaceeyatsletiacsos Ric sionrsdtestos ns cic N tae alec esi auneiediace N 81 Convertifie Basie MBRO GPT morien a vans nsdealdcnat ONuc nade aivenst nau dodsaldcnat 0Nsacai apaeceua EER 81 WG AUN MBR iceus teeta ne slau cant ta A aceubnhe uit acai e Lainie c lie ta ciel tal uel sd ited aid ce le ata fale 82 Changing Prina SiO aarccecscah i colscnora E T os auinsouaidee sawenecalieuca tuaesee atandealsanous al tedn deesaatouaeesoemeuaek 82 Task Scheduling corio T a AE T E E sataneisentenciecuieace 84 Seting a meta exces as casta nsec insscaactoauncaetce E A S 84 Manainn Tas Keera a E E E E O OA 85 CREATING a Scheduled T aSK is oroita A E E E ecaetodanedsasnetanteaues 86 SCAPUNE sass vassal e ori A aE NAE A A AO EAO 87 Extra F nctiona liy aunan a A a N a a a 89 View Partition Hard DIS
177. i To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Once it has been loaded you will see the Universal Application Launcher In general it enables to run components of the product load drivers for undefined hardware or establish a network connection Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 18 Paragon Backup amp Recovery 15 Home lo a m gt fe Backup to Virtual Disk P2P Adjust Log Saver Restat Shutdown 3 Click on the required operation to start Hints on the selected at the moment item will help you make the right choice 4 Consult the help system by pressing ALT F1 to know more on the subject The WinPE based recovery environment offers excellent hardware support However in case it doesn t have a driver for your disk controller your hard disks will be unavailable Please consult the Adding specific drivers scenario to know how to tackle this issue Basic Concepts This chapter explains terms and ideas that show how the program works To understand these helps to obtain a general notion of the operation performance and makes it easier for the user to operate the program System and Data Protection The data protection issue is a growing cause of worrying for more and more people today Indeed it is hardly to find a person who will be particularly happy when all precious information on the hard disk is irreversibl
178. ides with its help you can easily map network shares To manually set up a network connection and map a network share please do the following 1 Click Configure Network 2 Inthe opened dialog provide an IP address a network mask default gateway etc for your network device Ethemet adapter Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection IP address configuration es Obtain an IP address automaticaly Renew address Release address f Use the following IP address IP Address 192 168 40 170 Subnet Mask 209 295 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 400 2 Advanced DNS WINS configuration W Obtain DNS server address automaticaly DNS server 197 166 40 2 Advanced W Obtain WINS server address automaticaly Primary WINS server 197 166 40 2 Secondary WINS server fo Oo 0 0 Load from file Save to file Apphy Cancel 3 Click the Network drivers tab to map a network share Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 205 Dive Network path o i O Map Network Drive Disconnect Drive 4 Click Map Network Drive and provide all the necessary information to map a network share in the opened dialog Remote location mapping Anetwork share E Map to drive letter z Make permanent connection Connect as user Cancel e Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path
179. ifier that is placed in the partition It is used to quickly detect partitions of supported types A number of operating systems completely rely on it to distinguish supported partitions Partition ID is saved in appropriate entries of the Partition Table and takes only 1 byte of space Partition Label or Volume Label is a small textual field up to 11 characters that is located in the partition s boot sector This value is used for notification purposes only It is detectable by any partitioning tool including the DOS FDISK utility Modern operating systems save it within a file system e g as a special hidden file Thus it is able to contain a relatively large amount of text in multiple languages Partitioning Scheme is a set of rules constraints and format of the on disk structures to keep information on partitions located on a hard disk Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 215 There are known several partitioning schemes The most popular of them is the so called DOS partitioning scheme It was introduced by IBM and Microsoft to use multiple partitions in the disk subsystems on IBM PC compatible computers Another popular partitioning scheme is the so called Logical Disks Model LDM that originates from the UNIX mainframe systems Veritas Executive accommodates a simplified version of LDM to the Windows 2000 operating system Windows 2000 and XP support two quite different partitioning schemes the ol
180. ill allow you to fix problems concerning an inappropriate order of partitions In order to modify enumeration of the primary partitions you should take the following steps 1 Select a hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Primary Slot There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Y Are you sure you want to change primary slots order Tou are about to change primary slots order on Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware YHwae irtual S SCSI Disk Dev Your computer may no longer boot correctly Slot No Object type File System Volume label Primary FAT 32 NEW VOLUME Primary ES New Yolurne 0 2 Primary Linus Ext NEM VOLUME 3 Primary Linus Swap No label Name Hew Yolume F Volume label New Volume Total size 3 6 GB File system MTFS Used space 38 8 MB Free space 3 6 GB Start sector 5640192 End sector 13273087 No 3 Inthe opened dialog you can see the current enumeration of the primary partitions of the selected hard disk in the Partition Table To help you distinguish partitions from one another the program provides the following parameters for every partition Slot Volume Partition type File system Partition size Volume label There are two buttons on the right to move the selected partition up and down within the primary part
181. in the Logical free space only Logical partitions can be created Within the Primary free space both Primary partitions or the Extended Partition can be created e Partition Size Define the size in Mb of the new partition e Free space before Define the position in Mb of the new partition relative to the beginning of the block of free space e Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the new partition Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map The virtual operations are to be available e File system for new partition From the pull down list select a file system the newly created partition will be formatted to otherwise the partition will remain unformatted so that it will not be ready to use e Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification e Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become available W U
182. ion oo Users 3 Windows Rename FG New folder FT Delete F8 File name Img DO pbt Save File type Archive tiles pbf Cancel lt Back Next gt Cancel 10 Edit the archive name if necessary Backup destination Archive name HDD1 Parntoi Img_O_1 pbf Space available on destination 490GB Approximate archive size 52 8 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space Oo available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another E drive needs to be selected 11 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 132 Archive text comment Please enter backup comments to describe the archive Archive Img_O_1 pbf created 2013 10 10 05 23 24 12 On the Backup Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process Oo This operation can also be accomplished under Windows Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition To back up required files or folders and then place the resulted image to a local mounted unmounted drive please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Inte
183. ion in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification Surface test level Define the level of the surface check to make the program find bad and unstable sectors and mark them unusable in the file system metadata Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Yes button to confirm the operation lt j Are you sure you want to create a new partition on disk 37 ou are about to create a new partition in Unallocated 119 9 GB area Please select size position and file system of the new partition Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey l p o Hew Volume H j 114 7 GE NTFS Create new partition az Please specify new partition size 117546 OMB 122 879 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 2551 OMB 122 870 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition 27862 OMB 122 870 MB Please select file system for new partition NTFS T Please enter new volume label New Volume Please specify drive letter H w More options Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 70 e Define whether the partition will be Primary Extended or Logical You can choose the desired partition type from the pull down list As a matter of fact the available alternatives fundamentally depend on the selected block of free space with
184. ion opposite a hard disk s name or a partition s name depending on the chosen task Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 122 Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or partition you want to back up Name Type File system Size tee e E My Computer My Computer iv Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard Disk Drive n00 GB E First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes a Master Boot Record MBA O Bytes Local Disk Primary NTFS 350MB 2 hae M E Local Disk C Primary NTFS 2o0 3GB E Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive 500 GE f First Hard Disk Track First Track 0 Bytes fae SiMaster Boot Record MER O Bptes Local Disk F Primary NTFS 495 6 GB e CSNEW VOLUME Primary LinuxExt4 350MB E Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev Internal Hard Disk Drive fol GB First Hard Disk Track First Track O Bytes kw Master Boot Record MER 0 T 4 The size of objects to back up 280 3 GB Estimated archive size 48 3 GB You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 7 On the Backup Destination page select the Save data to the Backup Capsule option There are several ways t
185. irtual Drives 3 Calla context menu right click of the mouse button for a file folder you need and then select the Export item Name Size Modified GR Drives 5 Hard Disks I F 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 500 GB Ge BP Primary NTFS 350 MB i Se Primary NTFS C 499 6 GB f H E Recycle Bin 9 3 2013 1 49 11 PM Ogi i Documents and settings onal PerfLogs pf 22 2013 6 45 52 AM 22 2013 7 22 35 AM E Program Files Refresh 1672013 8 18 50 PM Program Files x86 9 3 2013 1 54 48 PM E ProgramD ata 10 16 2013 8 21 08 PM System Volume Information 10 16 2013 8 18 29 PM E Users 9 3 2013 1 48 22 PM E Windows 9 3 2013 9 43 00 AM 4 Select a place on the disk where the file folder will be extracted to Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 182 Lookin E Local Diski El 8 F A Address Co Mame De Disk Drives F B Local Disk C E Utils 10 di arc new 10 Network Places H di PerfLogs By l Program Files 10 di Program Files 86 qi di Users g Windows qe 5 Click the OK button to accomplish the operation The current version of the program does not enable to access virtual containers and file archives with Volume Explorer Fixing Boot Problems without Restore Correcting EFI parameters To specify a bootable device in the EFI boot entry please do the following 1 Start up the computer
186. isk E hl 4 T Hame Size Date S 2 E Local Disk C m arc 091013125156058 107972013 11 17 27 PM m arc 091013131559760 107972013 11 22 08 PM di arc 10101 3062156703 107972013 11 22 08 PM Ee di FLOQOOOO000000000000 107972013 11 22 19 PM E archive pli 309 Bytes 1075 2013 11 22 19 PM fae __ are_0910173737559 60 ph 28 3 MB 10 9 2013 6 22 46 4M m arc 091013133756622 107972013 6 38 02 4M Files of type Archive files Gwitch to Archive List View Archive File Details Total size 24 KB 24 576 Bytes Backup date 10 9 2013 11 22 19 PM Archive size 389 Bytes Comment Mo comment is available File Canc 097013737559 760 archive phi Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter After the operation is completed you receive an incremental backup of the selected file archive It is placed into the same destination as the base image ale This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a cyclic partition backup To automate the partition backup process please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Cyclic Backup 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe What to back up page select a partition you want to make a cyclic backup of Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 147 Click the check
187. isting files ALL selected files will be replaced with files from backup 7 On the Restore Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Please overview the restore options ou can return to the coresponding page and change the options by clicking on title hyperlinks Objects to Restore Object s selected 1 Total data size 71 9 MB 75 470 533 Bytes Specitied restore destination Destination path C4 Space available on destination 219 4 GB 235 596 853 760 Bytes 8 On the next page of the wizard confirm the operation by selecting the appropriate option 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer Oo This operation can also be accomplished under Windows File Transfer Wizard To restore separate files and folders from a backup image with the File Transfer Wizard please do the following 1 Call the popup menu for the required backup image right click of the mouse button in the Archive Database and then select the menu item Restore File from Archive Thus you automatically open it with the File Transfer Wizard ee Show archives hi Ti Show all hi amp B Ei x Type Creation Date source Object Size Archive Size Flags E 107 1172013 4 16 55 4M Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev fo
188. it Windows OS accommodated on a disk you d like to convert to GPT it won t start up after the operation is over In order to convert a basic MBR disk to a basic GPT you should take the following steps 1 Select a basic MBR hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Hard Disk gt Convert to GPT hard disk Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 82 era Are vou sure you d like to convert Basic MEBER Hard Disk 0 se BAe arian Y Mware VMware Virtual S S5051 Disk Dev ta GPT Please Mote Despite the fact that all on disk contents remain intact during the operation Your OS may no longer boot corectly for Windows sP 32 bit for instance does not support GPT disks 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation The program can only convert basic MBR disks Updating MBR The program enables to overwrite the current bootable code in the MBR Master Boot Record by the standard bootstrap code This can help to repair a corrupted bootable code of a hard disk resulted from a boot virus attack or a malfunction of boot management software In order to update MBR of a hard disk you should take the following steps 1 Selecta hard disk on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Update MBR Oo There are other ways to start up this function please con
189. itch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Specity a base image for an increment Lookin E facke Soa OOOO Oa KB Name Size Date e inc i0 oA 72014 5 2541 AM inc_2_1_2 M42014 1 41 36 AM inc_3_2_3 9 4 2014 1 43 34 4M fe lM Gackup_HDDO_20740901_0453 pfi 112 KE 9 4 2014 1 43 34 AM Files of type YO Container files Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Backup HDODO_20140901_ 0453 Comment Backup image 20140901 0453 File E Backup HDDO_20140901_0453 Backup_HDDO_20140901_0453 phi Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 9 17 2014 5 06 32 4M View YD container detailed structure To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 4 Onthe next page you can see contents of the selected virtual container Mark a checkbox opposite a file or folder to build up contents of the future incremental image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 116 Flease select files you d like to complementary back up To select files click checkbox next to file name Name Type File system Size 2 ne ee NO NAME GPT Volume JEM service volume El Local Disk GPT Volume Gi Local Disk GPT Volume NTFS fy iF H E Recycle Bin H B Documents and Settin
190. ition if File Traneler Wend necessary and then activate the Hard Disk or Partition pull down menu and select the operation needed Boot Corrector P Network Configurator Log Saver Eject CD DVD start the command line Reboot the computer Power off y Sl r Ce E k3 Backup amp Recovery enables to run wizards and dialogs to specify program settings to visualize the operating environment and the hard disk configuration Backup to Virtual Disk Wizard enables to back up hard disk and partitions to VD Restore from Virtual Disk Wizard allows restoring hard disks and partitions from VD File Transfer Wizard allows coping files folders to another disk or a partition as well as recording them to CD DVD e Boot Corrector helps to correct the Windows System Registry without Windows being loaded e Network Configurator enables to establish a network connection under Linux If you are going to use network resources first launch the Network Configuration Wizard to establish a network connection Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 17 e Log Saver helps to collect and send the necessary log files to the Technical Support e Eject CD DVD e Command Line allows experienced users to execute any operation e Reboot the computer e Power off the computer To move within the menu please use the arrow keys of the computer keyboard Safe Mode When the Safe mod
191. k C E Network 6 Edit the archive name if necessary Please specify the archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive details Archive name jarc_051 013135006539 Estimated archive size 5 5 GB Space available on backup destination 10 7 GB i Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved drive needs to be selected 148 7 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive E Ry No commen 8 Seta timetable for the operation Please specify how and when would you like to perform the task Week Y W Do not reboot if reboot i required System shutdown after backup Start the task or 10709203 4 at 12 00 AM Every i week s or W Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Do not run the task after 1070972013 Speci user name and password Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Task Scheduling chapter 9 Onthe Cyclic backup type page choose the way of creating a cyclic backup There are several types of the cyclic backup the Wizard can perform Please choose the one you would like to carry out Cyclic Backup Type f Basic type
192. k Dev Please select where to create a copy Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev i o Unallocated 119 9 GB The program enables to copy a partition to a block of free space which is smaller than the partition itself taking into account only actual amount of data e Copy parameters The wizard enables to specify the following options Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 66 Your hard disk after changes Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev y Unallocated E 96 5 GB Where to place a copy Please specify the size of the new partition 23962 76 HE 122 879 ME Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 a O HB 122 803 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition 3891 T O HB 122 802 HEB Partition size Define the size in Mb of the copied partition Free space before Define the position in Mb of the copied partition relative to the beginning of the available range of disk space Free space after Define the amount of trailing free space in Mb at the end of the available range of disk space Partition size and position may also be defined by using the drag and drop technique To do that just carry out the required operation on the Disk Map Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI
193. l be built directly on MFT skipping the file system analysis Next action will be comparison of file attributes e g creation modification date inside directory trees of the source and backup volumes to Copy all file clusters with changed attributes Copy all file clusters with changed location of cluster chains Copy all clusters of new files Copy all sectors with metadata for instance all copies of directories and MFT for NTFS Depending ona file system and its occupation a full metadata copy can take up to several hundreds of megabytes This method is the fastest of all three but increments will also be the largest e Compare all data At first there will be created a list of all occupied cluster chains After comparison with the backup contents all changed clusters will be copied This method is slower but more space saving than the first one Please note however that if an increment has been done after defragmentation plenty of redundant data might fall into it as during the defragmentation process data is being moved but not changed e Compare changed data It s a combination of the mentioned above methods After detection of new changed files there will be created a list of clusters to copy During the copying clusters on source and backup volumes will be compared in order to copy only changed clusters and clusters of new files as well as clusters of changed file system metadata not all metadata This method is th
194. l GE 5 1 GB at p 107 1072013 7 18 56 AM File level Archive 119 Bytes F 10 10 2013 18 24AM File evel Archive OE anioe Alve tz Uue Laberg 248 Bytes je J E 1071072013 7 11 42 AM Basic MER Hard Disk 3 Delete the Archive fram the Database 44 7 ME E 10 10 2013 7 08 11 AM Basic MBR Hard Disk 3 57 8 MB es Restore Files J 1071072013 7 00 47 SM File level Archive 48MB ke 3 J 10 10 2013 6 55 43 AM File level Archive Incremental File Backup 389 Bytes A J J 1071072013 6 54 26 4M File level Archive wy Restore File From archive 55 9KE 8 32 J 10 10 2013 6 46 07 AM File level Archive 48MB ke 3 TS 107 1072013 2 17 45 AM New Volume G 3KE 3 amp 101072013 2 1719 AM New Volume G e2 f MB 2 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 180 Clipboard Source Bea mx 2 E images C UsersAdministratorsDesktop images Hame Er SUSIE TT Y OTAN TPT ALT I di Users E 2 2 m Administrator i AppData 2 2 2 m Application Data di Contacts m Cookies 3 di Desktop bd Total data size 15 9 MB 3 Onthe Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the data f
195. l mode is enabled or generate a script file to execute it later What would you like to da Restore now Restore specified objects after completing the wizard t Generate script Create a script to restore the specified objects later 9 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes 10 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Mark the checkbox at the bottom of the window to automatically switch off the computer on the successful accomplishment of the restore operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 159 Oo This operation can also be accomplished under Windows Legacy Backup Format Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got the bootable backup capsule containing a backup of your hard disk That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your hard disk from a backup image contained in the backup capsule when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the bootable backup capsule By default the program offers to use the F1 hot key to boot from it This scenario implies that the backup capsule is bootable 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more
196. l partition Changing Partition Attributes This chapter explains how you can change partition attributes Active flag Hidden flag Volume Label etc Mark Partition Active Inactive The program enables to set an active inactive flag for primary partitions of a hard disk By default an operating system will boot only if its partition is active or bootable In order to mark a partition active inactive you should take the following steps 1 Selecta primary partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Mark Partition as Active Inactive There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject A Are you sure you want to set the volume as active Tou are about to set the volume F No label NTFS as active If you already have active volumes this action might render your system unbootable 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation 1 There can only be one active partition on a hard disk otherwise your operating system will fail to boot Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 78 Hide Unhide Partition The program allows you to hide unhide primary and logical partitions By default an operating system does not mount hidden partitions thus preventing access to their contents In order to hide unhide a partition you should take the
197. launcher right click of the mouse on the required volume then select Unlock Volume 6 Asaresult the volume should be unlocked an Administrator X windows SYSTEM32 cmd exe Eo Please use nanage bde command to unlock BitLocker encrypted volume A nanage bde un lock lt Driyve gt rk FathloEsternalKeyFile gt ir manage bde unlock lt Drive gt RecoveryPassword lt RecoveryPassword gt Drives drive letter Followed by a colon PathToExternalKeyFile gt external recovery key File that can be used the drive lt RecoveryPassword to unlock recovery password that can be used to unlock the drive Examples nanage bde unlock C rk E RecoveryKey bek manage bde unlock C RecoveryPassword 25349 626703 316217 327426 216348 3 bbd gt Ssb2 05 78 ES6 Prograns Paragon Software progran gt manage bde unlock e rk eco recoverykey b BitLocker Drive Encryption Configuration Tool version 6 2 9208 Copyright C 2612 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved he File e recoverykey bek successfully unlocked volume E b w Ws Prograns Paragon Software progran gt If going to the main launcher of our program now Open Advanced Interface the volume will be correctly detected and become available for operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 212 Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev System Reserved C Local
198. le C arc 101013062903344 pbt To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Look in Local Disk C eX F Mame Size Date e arc 101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM are_101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM Sieg ME src 107107 3062903344 pbt 267GB 10 9 2013 11 53 13 PM PerfLogs 8 22 2013 8 22 35 AM Files of type Archive files r Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Local Disk C Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 4777 7 GB Used pace 32GB Free space 445 6 GB File C4 arc 101013062903344 pbt Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 137 5 The Archive Content page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive It includes a full description of properties about the partition In addition there is the possibility to modify backup settings To activate the advance mode
199. lected partition taking its capacity into account e Volume label Enter a label for the selected partition in this textual field It is an irrelevant parameter usually used for drive identification In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page Depending on the chosen file system the following options become available W Use 0S built in format routine Please select number of sectors per cluster eo Restore defaults e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox to restrict the available values according to the used OS e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition formatted to the specified file system Deleting Partitions Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Delete Partition Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 74 Dialog Startup In order to start the operation you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on t
200. lities for PC users such as editing video archiving music backing up CD images etc Huge increase in space is great but it poses a number of problems most important of which are effective data organization and speed Large drives are always going to take longer to search than smaller volumes and an operating system is going to have its work cut out both finding and organizing files It is for this reason that many people decide to invest in multiple hard drives but there is an easy solution drive partitioning Partitioning lets you divide a single physical drive into a number of logical drives each of which servers as a container with its own drive letter and volume label thus enabling the operating system to process data more efficiently Besides partitioning makes it possible to organize data so that it is easy to find and manage You can set aside for instance 40 GB of a 160 GB hard drive for the OS 70 GB for storing video and another 50 GB for your favorite music collections to provide transparent data storage It is also worth mentioning to that with a hard drive properly partitioned such routine operations as files de fragmentation or consistency check will not be that annoying and time consuming any more By detaching the OS from the rest of the data you can tackle one more crucial issue in case of a system malfunction you can get the system back on track in minutes by recovering it from a backup image located on the other par
201. ll be stored pele are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how would you like to save the data f Save data to physical partitions f Burn the data to CD OVO or BD e Revision of changes The Transfer Summary page provides structurally divided information on all the actions made in the wizard Check the changes and come back to any step of the wizard if necessary by following the required hyperlink Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 93 Please overview the transfer options You can return to the corresponding page and change the options by clicking on title hyperlinks Objects to transfer Object s selected 1 Total data size 1 GB 1 076 198 272 Bytes Transter destination Destination path C4 Space available on destination 485 9 GB 521 742 041 086 Bytes Overwrite existing files No Result After the operation is completed the required data will be placed into the specified destination Available operation scenarios e Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk e Burning of data from the corrupted system disk to CD DVD e Copying of data from a backup to the corrupted system partition e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Mount Partition The program enables to assign or remove drive letters of existing formatted partitions Assign Drive Letter In order to mount a partition you should take the following st
202. log oh To view the Operations performed Operation 1 Correct partition boot record Partition targeted Hard disk 0 Partition 0 Status Successful Date and Time 2013 Oct 10 Thd 15 27 52 your computer he program Operation 2 Change drive letters Partition targeted Hard disk 0 Partition 0 Info System Root folder is WINDOWS Status Successful Date and Time 2013 Oct 10 Thd 15 28 39 Save 13 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 14 Reboot the computer Retrieving Transferring Individual Files and Folders Copying of data from the corrupted system disk to another hard disk To retrieve valuable information from your hard disk and copy it to another hard disk when the system fails to boot please do the following 1 Connect the second hard disk to the computer 2 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image i To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 3 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case
203. luded like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu e Floppy Disk Reboot the computer from a system floppy disk e Hard Disk 0 Boot from the primary hard disk e Find OS s on your hard disks The program will scan hard disks of your computer to find any bootable operating system 64 bit environment BOOT MENU Start Paragon RCD in sate mode Reboot Power ott Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 16 e Normal Mode Boot into the Linux normal mode This mode uses the full set of drivers recommended e Safe Mode Boot into the PTS DOS mode This mode can be used as an alternative of the Linux normal mode if it fails to work properly e Reboot Restart the computer e Power off Shut down the computer While working with the recovery environment you might experience some inconvenience caused by possible video artifacts It is just a result of changing video modes and in no way will affect the program functionality If this is the case please wait a bit and everything will be OK Normal Mode When the Normal mode is selected the Linux launch menu appears You can copy an entire hard disk or its i Th Paragon Backup and Recovery partitions to new locations Backup to Virtual Disk Wizard You can also save them as image files for later restoration Restore from Virtual Disk Wizard Please select the drive its part
204. ly the pending changes 7 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program i This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 175 Restoring a file increment to a partition backup Let s assume that your operating system gives trouble because of a virus attack But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a local disk Besides you make file increments of your documents and e mail database to that backup ona regular basis That s just enough to easily roll everything back to the point when run smoothly To restore your system partition with a file increment from a backup image located on a local disk please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Onthe Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required file increment archive to your system partition backup e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp Ee Ek J 10710 2013 6 46 07 AM File level Archive r1 9 ME 4 5 ME ee G 10710 2013 2 17 49 AM
205. mages Include masks manage files and folders that will be added to the archive IF include mask i specited all the files that do not conform to the mask will be omitted and wall not get Into the archive Use include masks Readable files 44 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category chm Delete filter htm Delete filter mht Delete filter html Delete filter pdf Delete filter txt Delete filter hip Delete filter rtf Delete filter doc Delete filter docx Delete filter als Delete filter xlsx Delete filter wn Delete filter ppt Delete filter pptx Delete filter Add category You can also create your own filter by clicking the Add category button Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 144 Filter I Browse Description i ou can use wildcards and to specify the mask men e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be included or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not 1 By setting an include mask you automatically ignore files that do not match to
206. mart Backup Wizard Startup e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Smart Backup Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 55 Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Smart Backup Wizard Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the backup operation e The object to back up Click on a section you find answering to your task Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition E rriall Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail J Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up Disk or Partitions to create a sector based backup of the whole disk system or only separate partitions E mail to create a file based backup of e mail databases accounts and address books of MS Outlook MS Express and Windows Mail Media Files to create a file based backup of all media files photo video music etc stored in the My Documents folder Documents to create a file based backup of all office documents stored in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders to create a file based back
207. mes more memory addresses than a 32 bit processor With these resources even a very large database can be cached in memory Although many business applications run without problems on 32 bit systems others have grown so complex that they use up the 4 GB memory limitation of a 32 bit address space With this large amount of data fewer memory resources are available to meet memory needs On a 64 bit server most queries are able to perform in the buffers available to the database Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 28 Some 32 bit applications make the transition to the 64 bit environment seamlessly others do not For instance system level utilities and programs that provide direct hardware access are likely to fail Our program offers a full fledged support of the 64 bit architecture providing fault tolerant work for such system dependent modules as Hot Processing Copy Operations Hard drive duplication nowadays is becoming highly popular among PC users That is due to some definite advantages it can offer First of all many people clone hard disks just to back up data for security reasons The present day copy utilities enable to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capability In case of a system malfunction the user can get the system back on track in minutes No additional configur
208. metadata thus minimizing the risk of data loss In order to start the surface test you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition or a block of free space on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Test Surface There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 From the pull down list choose the level of the surface check Gay Test surface of volume Ey Testing volume surface allows to find bad blocks and other problems Please select a surface test level Pe mime lt p Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 96 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Check File System Integrity The program allows you to check integrity of a file system It can be used to detect possible file system errors before performing any operation on a partition To start the system integrity check you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Check File System Integrity There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Y Check volume C No label NTFS for errors Please note that check operation needs exclusive access to the volume You may
209. mode you need to click the More options button at the foot of the dialog page so you will be able to define Please select script generation options Allow to interact with the user Turn this option off if you do not want to get confirmation dialogs when the script is being carried out W Commit after each operation Turn this option on to ensure the changes will be committed after each operation W Check for errors after each operation Turn thi option on to make scrpt interpreter to check the result of each operation Use disk ID Turm this option on to use a disk ID instead of an indes in the script e Interaction with the user Mark the option to pause the script interpreter during the execution to prompt the user s confirmation or other input Otherwise the program will not stop using default values for parameters if needed e Commit after each operation Mark the option to commit changes after each operation e Check for errors after each operation Mark the option to insert a special code in script which checks the status of the last executed operation and stops the script processing if there are errors of any kind e Discard all operations on close Mark the option to empty the List of Pending Operations after generating the Script Result After the operation is completed you receive a new script file It is placed into the specified destination its features defined in the dialog Copyright 1994 2014
210. modern hard disks can additionally emulate the C H S geometry Hidden Partition The concept of a hidden partition was introduced in the IBM OS 2 Boot Manager By default an operating system does not mount a hidden partition thus preventing access to its contents A method of hiding a partition consists in changing the partition ID value saved in the Partition Table This is achieved by XOR ing the partition ID with a 0x10 hexadecimal value Master File Table MFT is a relational database that consists of rows of file records and columns of file attributes It contains at least one entry for every file on an NTFS volume including the MFT itself MFT is similar to a FAT table ina FAT file system MBR amp 1st track of the hard disk is the Oth sector of the disk MBR Master Boot Record contains important information about the disk layout The used partitioning scheme The starting records of the Partition Table The standard bootstrap code or the initial code of boot managers disk overlay software or boot viruses Generally the Oth sector is used for similar purposes in all existing partitioning schemes The MBR capacity is not sufficient to contain sophisticated boot programs That s why the on boot software is allowed to use the entire Oth track of the disk For example boot managing utilities such as LILO GRUB and Paragon Boot Manager are located in the Oth track Partition ID or File system ID is a file system ident
211. n path are not allowed men In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 46 Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By marking unmarking a checkbox opposite its name you can choose whether to use it or not File backup include options ae Include into file backup archive Specity masks for files and folders that must be added to archives Readable files 44 filters Add titer Rename category Delete category chm htm mht html pdf txt hip rtf doc Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter _ docx Delete filter Xl xlsx WTI pp pptx Yad Ydy Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Delete filter Add category In this section you can find a lot of ready made include filters to effectively control contents of your file based backup El images
212. n will be available for it Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev BB System Reserved E Local Disk C M350 MB NTFS E 13 6 GE NTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dew To unlock it please right click of the mouse on the corresponding volume in Windows Explorer then select Unlock Volume or use the corresponding option of the main launcher Partition gt Unlock Volume There are other ways to unlock a volume encrypted by BitLocker For more information please consult documentation provided by Microsoft 3 Enter an unlock password BitLocker F Enter password to unlock this drive Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 210 4 Asaresult the volume should be unlocked 4 Devices and drives 5 am fF Local Disk C Lay in hol Floppy Disk Drive A a J System Reserved E ey OVD RW Drive D2 y TFC B 90 5 MB free of 349 Mi fv f DATA F i ry f g 194 GB fr If going to the main launcher of our program right now Open Advanced Interface the volume will be correctly detected and become available for operation Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev System Reserved E Local Disk C 350 MB NTFS 19 6 GB NTFS Basic MBR Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Dev fl DATA F qj Unallocated MB 195
213. ngs click on the Send test e mail button to check if everything is OK Send e mail notification on apply Specify an e mail to send notifications on the carried out operations Send mail in HTML format Activate the option to create messages in the HTML format instead of plain text Send complete report after applying operations Activate the option to create an in depth report on the carried out operations and send it after performing the last operation Send graphical view of the disk sub system before and after apply Activate the option to allow the program to attach two pictures of the disk layout made before and after the operation is completed Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 48 By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Operation dependency options Log files options Log Log files options Logs directory a Browse Please select a folder name to place an engine log files stubact log etc White logs in Bluescreen Choose this option to allow engine operations logging when actions need to be restarted and continued in Bluescreen mode Stubact log file truncation Choose a storage lite span for the stubact log file Please note once the defined period has been expired the file will be emptied f Infinite f Minimal f Custom 1 hours Clean now In this section you can set up the program logging engine e Logs dire
214. nt l Saturday restore point a Please note that the current version of the product has a number of limitations regarding sector based increments Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 21 e Increments can only be created for full archives of the new type with a pfi index file Any of our flagship products since Backup amp Recovery 12 supports this functionality e Increments can only be created for full archives stored on a local mounted drive or a network share e Increments cannot be created for archives of entire GPT disks e Increments can only be restored under Windows if no restart is needed or WinPE e Increments cannot be processed with the Synthetic Backup Wizard e Increments cannot be processed with the Check Archive Integrity Wizard e Increments cannot be processed with the Create File Complement Wizard e Increments cannot be browsed in Volume Explorer e Increments can only be used with our software e Increments cannot be compressed e Increments cannot be encrypted e Increments cannot be splitted Full and Incremental File Backups A full file based archive only contains files and folders It is really efficient when backing up an e mail database or particular documents as no redundant data is processed But if you care about maintaining a files history you can benefit from one more supplementary technique called Incremental File Backup An incremental archive only contains dat
215. object This image is placed into the specified destination its features defined by the wizard Available operation scenarios e Backing up a hard disk or partition to the Backup Capsule e Backing up a hard disk or partition to external media CD DVD e Backing up a hard disk or partition to a network drive e Backing up files to an FTP SFTP server e Backing up a dual boot Mac to an external USB drive e Backing up files to a local mounted unmounted without drive letter assigned partition e Creating a differential to a full partition backup e Creating a sector increment to a full partition backup e Creating a file increment to a full partition backup e Creating an increment to a full file backup Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 57 e Creating acyclic partition backup e Merging a full partition backup with one of its differentials Restoring System and Data The program includes a convenient and reliable restore wizard With its help you can restore all types of backup images created with the program It provides easy to understand instructions to configure and perform all the necessary settings Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup e Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Restore Oo There are other ways to start up this function please c
216. ocal Disk C Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 477 7 GB Used space 15 9 GB Free space 461 7 GB File C fanc_097073737 5597 60arc_0970737 37559760 pfi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 142 Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter e By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Lookin E Local Disk C 0 A OY Hame Size Date E Local Disk C Ge arc 091013125156058 10 9 2013 5 52 57 AM arc_091013131559760 10 9 2013 6 22 51 AM are_091013133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM Ses K 2ro_ 0910131 33756622 pbt 47MB 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM m are_091013133756622 pli BFE KB 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM i lam 01014140F RCETI mfra 16K 1029 9017 630 07 Ahd Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Hew Volume E Comment Mo comment is available Volume label New Volume File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used pace 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB File C arc 0910131337566227 arc _ 091013133756622 pbf Oo To know more on the subj
217. ode the Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Choose copy options that suit best your task Copy options Partitions raw copy Resize options W Remove free blocks between partitions W Copy data and resize partitions proportionally Mark the checkbox to copy the hard disk in the secfardye seciar mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as welll This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation The Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive option will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process 8 Onthe Revise Copy Results page review all parameters of the operation Original hard disk Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Hard disk copy Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev Local Disk I i f49 6 GE NTFS Proportional resize the copy will take 750 GB 100 of target disk space Min Copy Size 10 8 GB Mias Co
218. oe Backup Capsule 200 3 GB NTFS 219 3 GB Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware YHware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l l l 5 al Unallocated ee 350 GB To help you get a clear cut picture of the operation outcome the program allows inspecting the resulted disk layout Restoring Partition e Size of the restored volume and free space before and after it on the disk Geometry Restore Options Please specify the size of the restored partition 14607 167 MB 767990 MB Please specify size of free space before the partition 0 OMB 753383 MB Please specify size of free space after the partition 7533834 OMB 753383 MB Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 61 e Drive letter assignment after restore The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the restored partition Partition Restore Options Assign the following drive letter E e Create new EFI boot entry for destination drive If you ve got to do with a 64 bit Windows configured to the uEFI boot mode the following option will become available for you to define what instance of Windows OS you d like to boot from once the operation is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector sh anal new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager For destination hard drive Oo The option above will b
219. of the system Though all Windows systems have built in driver repositories please be prepared to have Oo additional drivers when dealing with Windows XP Server 2003 because for these systems they are very modest Technology Application Let s consider a number of situations when the Adaptive Restore technology can help you out e Ifyou need to migrate to a different hardware platform with minimal effort e If you need to upgrade hardware while keeping all programs and settings intact e If you need to replace failed hardware and cannot find an exact match for original system specifications Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 24 Known Issues 1 After transferring Microsoft Vista and later versions to different hardware you will need to re activate license of the system It s normal behavior as these systems keep tracking any change of hardware Re activation is legally justified in this case as you transfer your system to another PC 2 If you ve installed several operating systems on one partition we can only add drivers to the latest version of OS Microsoft highly recommends that you install an operating system on a separate partition 3 Please note drivers are not cached during selection That s why if you select a driver to add to the system but it s already unavailable during the operation the program will end the operation with an error Paragon Hot Processing amp Volume Shadow Copy
220. olumes Local Disk C NTFS 499 4 GB Partitions Recovery partition 1 NTFS OEM service volume 300 ME NO NAME partition 2 OEM service volume 99 MB Local Disk partition 3 128 MB Backup destination Backup location Ic Ueers Administrator Desktop Available space 487 9 GB If you re going to save backup images on a network share or a physical partition a partition that doesn t have a drive letter in the system click on the Browse button In the opened dialog you can see several options Look in E Local Disk C me g g Address C Users AdrministratorsDesktop Disk Drives pare a mae SI oo o archive_db Urga UT Tb AM ee PerfLogs 9 22 2013 8 22 35 AM Na i Program Files 10 22 2013 5 01 15 AM TAN He Program Files 86 9 3 2013 2 54 48 PM EP jo Users 9 3 2013 2 48 22 PM Ud Administrator 10 29 2013 6 36 23 AM H W kchmviewer 10 23 2013 7 12 13 AM Contacts 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM SEPM Desktop 10 29 2013 6 45 32 AM Documents 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM Downloads 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM Favorites 9 3 2013 2 48 42 PM n i iw ONT TAD AD Dk Select Disk Drives to use a local disk as backup destination Select Partitions to use a physical partition as backup destination Click on the Map Network Drive icon to map a network share to use it as backup destination our case 5 To mapa network share please do the following Remote location mapping
221. on Provides average speed with the reasonable image size Image split Enable image splitting Choose this option to enable splitting the archive to several files Maximum split size 2000 MB 4 6 On the Synthetic Archive Destination page select where you want to place the resulted backup image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 151 There are several ways the Wizard can store your data Please select how you would like to save the archive f Save data to local network drives f Save data to physical partitions f Save data to FTP locations f Burn the data to CD OVO or BD 7 Edit the archive name if necessary Archive details Archive name Jarc _1 01013091945891 Estimated archive size 45 7 GB Space available on backup destination 417 2 GB Please take into account values of the parameters Estimated archive size and Space Oo available on backup destination if the archive size exceeds the available space another drive needs to be selected 8 Add comments to your backup describing its contents Please enter a short comment to describe the archive E Ry No comment 9 On the Synthesis Summary page review all parameters of the operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive a new full partition archive It is placed into the specified destination a local or network disk
222. on is over Anyway you can specify a bootable device at any time through Boot Corrector Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 62 cas new EFI boot entry For destination drive Mark the checkbox to create new EFI boot entry called Windows Boot Manager For destination hard drive Oo The option above will be available to the user only if the target disk becomes Bootable GPT as a result of the migration process Result The wizard will restore the archived data and make it available to use in the operating system To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Available operation scenarios e Restoring a hard disk from the bootable Backup Capsule e Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD e Restoring a system partition from a network drive e Restoring a system partition from a local drive e Restoring a dual boot Mac from an external USB drive e Restoring a file increment e Restoring a file increment to a partition backup e Restoring separate files and folders from a backup Copy Tasks In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to make a copy of a hard disk or a separate partition Cloning Hard Disks You can clone a hard disk of any file system During the hard disk copying process the program moves controlling records of used partitioning scheme the bootstrap code and on disk partitions That
223. only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 188 Oo By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 4 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 5 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 6 Select a disk where the files you need are stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Source CA Ext4FS 1 on Disk 1 NEWVOLUME wr My computer i Root dir Ka iMyComputer My computer wi imnt Mounted resources i imntdisk Local disks i imedia Removable disks 4 IDE CD DVD NECVMWa VMware IDE Sa C Ext4FS 1 on Disk 1 NEW WOLU 7 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source 9 Mindows System HDDO Part1 Windows 9 SottwareDistribution 3 Speech oo System D System32 3 SystemResources 3 Syswows4 C TAPI Cd Tasks 3 Temp oo ToastData 9 tracing Total data size nia Calc Rename FG Delete F8 Click the Calc button to estimate the resulted data size 8 On the Select Destination Type choose the way the data will be stored Select the Save data to any local drive or a network share item Please select how would yo
224. onsult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the restore operation e A backup image to be restored The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Show all amp be Ee 1071072013 7 78 58 4M File level Archive 1071072013 2 78 24 AM File level Archive 107 1072013 7 11 42 AM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCS Disk Dey 107 1072013 7 08 11 AM Basic MBAR Hard Disk 3 VMware VMware Virtual 5S SCS Disk Dey 1071072013 7 00 47 AM File level Archive 1071072013 6 55 45 AM File level Archive 1071072013 6 54 26 AM File level Archive 1071072013 6 48 07 AM File level Archive 1071072013 21 49 AM New Volume G 1071072013 21819 AM New Volume G 107972013 11 29 07 PM Local Disk C 4 10 9 2013 11 22 79 PM File level Archive 107972013 11 17 38 PM Filelevel Archive F AELA L L LON L La La f T A C L Switch to File wiew Archive File Details Total size U Butes Backup date 10 10 2073 7 18 58 4M Archive size 119 Bytes Comment Mo comment is available File C are_1010137417850771 FLOQOQ000000000000000 archive phi To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a sho
225. operation and modify them if necessary Click the Next button to start the backup process After the operation is completed you receive a differential backup of the selected partition It is placed into the specified destination a local or network disk the Backup Capsule or a CD DVD disc its features defined by the wizard This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Creating a sector increment to a full partition backup Before you start please take into account the following issues e You should have a full backup of the new type with a pfi index file Any of our flagship products since Backup amp Recovery 12 supports this functionality e Increments can only be created for full archives stored on a local mounted drive or a network share e Increments will be stored together with the corresponding full archive e Increments cannot be created for archives of entire GPT disks e Increments can only be restored under Windows if no restart is needed or WinPE e Increments can only be used with our software e Increment cannot be encrypted compressed or splitted e Increments cannot be browsed in Volume Explorer Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Basic Concepts section To update an image of the selected partition please do the following 1 Enable the Legacy features view 2 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Incremental Backup 3 On the Wizard
226. operations Virtual mode is an effective way of protection from any troubles since no operations will be executed until clicking the Apply button for confirmation thus giving a second chance to i weigh all pros and cons of this or that particular operation The program politely reminds the user that there are unsaved changes by showing the following window ay You have unsaved changes Express Mode Button By clicking on this button the user can switch to the express mode of operation at any time Disk Map As the name infers the Disk Map displays the layout of physical and logical disks Physical disks are represented with rectangle bars that contain small sized bars These small sized bars represent logical disks Their color depends on the file system of the appropriate partition By looking at the size of the bar s shaded area it is possible to estimate the used disk space For the selected at the moment object there s the possibility to call a context sensitive popup menu with available operations Disk map Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev E Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Large sized bars display the following information about physical disks e Type basic or dynamic MBR GPT e Manufacturer Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 33 e Model Small sized bars display the following information about logi
227. ose the required archive in the browser like window The Archive File Details section displays a short description of the selected image Name Size Date pool Weerverz Z i di Audio 6 2013 4 23 25 AM e 4 16 2013 12 29 46 AM di IBackup Storage 10102073 12 52 24 4M gt di arc 091013125156058 1071072013 12 51 36 4M di arc 091013133756622 1071072013 1 43 35 4M o E diff 101013084041567 10 10 2013 2 00 08 AM s arc 091013133756622 pbf 47 MB 107 972013 6 38 02 AM a arc 091013133756622 ph R RFE RB 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM fot iela larc 091013133756622 ptm 1 6 K6 10 9 2073 6 38 02 AM Switch bo Archive List View Archive File Details Name Hew Volume E Comment Mo comment is available Volume label New Volume File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used pace 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB File 2l Backup Storage rarc 091013133756622 pbf 6 The What to Restore page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Select the required item to restore In our case it is the first partition of the disk Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 166 Please select one of the objectis to restore Mame Type File system Size Used F Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 WMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk D Internal Hard Disk Drive fol GE Primary NTFS 499 6 GE 9 7 GB FI E Local Disk Primary NTFS 250 3 GE 72 5 MB Archive Details Hame Local Disk Volume l
228. owing steps 1 Select a task on the Scheduled Tasks list 2 Click the Properties button on the Scheduled Tasks list There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 86 General Schedule Program C Program Files Faragon Software progranyscripts ese Script C Program FilesParagon Softwarescripte ser 2310131329457 63 pl Edit Browse Comments Backup has been scheduled 10 23 2073 6 29 45 AM W Enabled soy cma 3 Inthe opened dialog window you can see two tabs General and Schedule Click the General tab to modify e Full path to the macro command program interpreter which describes the scheduled task e Command line for starting the interpreter i e the task described in macro language e Comments referring to the task e The option of enabling disabling the task By clicking the Schedule tab you can modify the task timetable In order to apply the changes you need to click the Apply button at the foot of the dialog Creating a Scheduled Task You can set a timetable for execution of any operation For backup and copy operations the program offers handy wizards while all the others can be scheduled with the Save to Scheduler dialog To create a scheduled task you should take the following steps 1 Make sure the virtual mode of execution is enabled 2
229. p and the disk imaging backup With its help you can now create a sector based backup of your system to get it back on track in minutes in case of a virus attack or a hardware malfunction and then just make file based incremental images to the previously created sector based backup to keep updated only information that is critical for you Thus you will considerably save your system resources Cyclic Backup Wizard to automate the backup of separate partitions It is an ideal option if you want to establish a self acting data protection system This feature is only available for the Windows installation of the program Synthetic backup to change any property merge a given differential image with its full image split un split compress de compress etc of an existing backup image without carrying out a physical backup operation For virtual containers Backup to VD Wizard to protect separate partitions or entire hard disks Incremental Backup to VD Wizard to create incremental backup chains based on the full image File Complement to VD Wizard to create a file level incremental update to a sector level virtual container Retention Wizard for VD to automate the backup of separate partitions or entire hard disks It is an ideal option if you want to establish a self acting data protection system Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Restore Facilities e Restore an entire disk separate partitions or only files
230. pace before 0 501386 MB Free space after 0 501386 MB 10 On the Restore Summary page you can see your hard disk layout before and after the operation Click the Next button to initiate the restore process View changes on Basic Hard Disk 0 Your disk before operations inii O Your disk after operations i O 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program SuBnppratein patas 1 Restore partition or disk Operation progress Copied so far 376 4 MB Read so far 430 0 MB 86 0 MB s To copy 10 2G6B Write so far 430 0 MB 47 8 MBs Overall progress E Time elapsed 00 00 12 Time to finish 00 06 28 Restore Primary partition O disk 1 from file arc _091013125156058 arc_091013125156058 pbf Data writing 12 After completing the operation close the wizard and then reboot the computer Oo To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 164 Restoring a system partition from a network drive To restore your system partition from a backup image located on a network drive please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recover
231. play a short description of the selected image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 176 Lookin E LocalDisk C 0 A Mame Size Date p o E o ororo reo roo PP EEPE EA arc 091013131559760 10 9 2013 10 37 14 PM are_091013133756622 10 9 2013 6 38 02 AM are_09101314081 7551 10 9 2073 11 08 51 PM arc 091013140825801 10 10 2013 6 48 04 4M 2 di DIFF130258864840000000 10 10 2013 6 48 04 AM FLooooooooooaooo0000 10 10 2013 6 48 07 4M pe archive pii 48MB 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM archive pfp 23KB 10 10 2013 6 48 07 AM __ task_file pt 40 Bytes 10 10 2013 6 48 04 4M J are_0910131 409252011 pbt 18MB 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM e arc _091013140825801 pfi 576KB 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM iela larc _091013140825801 pfm 1 5K6 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM T arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM sf Gwitch to Archive List View Archive File Details Total sze 71 9 MB 75 470 833 Bytes Backup date 10 10 2073 6 48 07 4M Archive size 4 8 MB 5 134 266 Bytes Comment Mo comment is available File C arc 0910131408258017 DIFF130255864840000000 archive pfi Base archive C arc 091013140825501 arc 091013140825801 pbt Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 5 On the How to Restore File Complement page select whether you want to restore both the partition archive and the desired file increment or just the file increment In our case we
232. pp Size TS0GE Select the range of the disk space that will be occupied on the destination disk with copied partitions 9 Complete the wizard and then apply the pending changes 10 When copying is completed shut down the computer 11 Disconnect physically the source hard disk 12 Boot the computer from the destination hard disk Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 196 To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Making system bootable on different hardware P2P Adjust OS Let s assume you had to migrate to a new hardware platform You connected your system hard disk to the brand new PC and tried to start up the operating system you do know for sure now that this operation had been doomed to failure from the very beginning With our program you can easily tackle this naughty problem Before you start please make sure the following conditions are met e You ve got drivers for the new hardware ready to use not zipped or in exe files e Your OS is unrolled on the new computer not in a backup image To make a Windows physical system bootable on different hardware please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recovery media please mak
233. provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind is stored in Log files In order to send log files to the Paragon Support Team you should take the following steps 1 Click Tool Button then select Send Log Files 2 Provide a customer name and a product serial number 3 Give a detailed description on the encountered problem Send log files Please enter short description of your problem and send log files to support Customer Mame J ohn Smith Seral Number 09fde 654ec a49fc 7daf8 237a2 Content of inquiry Help By clicking the Send button the built in mail client will generate a template request with attached compressed log files and then send it to the Paragon Support Team Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operating system settings or the user documents Oo The Send Log Files function is only available when outgoing mail server SMTP and the user e mail address are properly set To learn more about it please consult the Settings Overview chapter View Logs With a handy dialog you can study logs on any operation carried by the program To make this job as easy as possible all the information is structurally divided besides there is the possibility to see the disk layout before and after an operation what is very convenient In order to view logs on carried o
234. ption allows much flexibility in managing backup contents In the wizard incremental chains will be automatically associated with their base image Please specify either the base image or the latest increment of the required incremental chain Hame E ase Image File increment 1 D File increment 2 g File increment 3 ba ADlncrement 4 Archive File Details Mame File increment 3 Comment Increment 3 File E Backup_ HODO 20140901_0453 nc_3_2_ arine a p Type Incremental YD Container Parent E Backup HOOO 20140901 _0453 inc_2_1_2 ine_ 2 pfi Creation date 94 2014 1 43 34 4M View VD container detailed structure Merge with parent You re allowed to merge contents of the last increment in the chain with the previous one thus updating its contents To do that please select the required last increment click the Merge with parent button then confirm the operation The merge operation will be accomplished once you confirm it Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 110 Are yoU sure you want to merge virtual container File increment 3 with the parent 7 Please note that merging the archive can take some time The merge operation can only be accomplished if both participants the last increment and its parent are unmounted Otherwise you ll get a corresponding warning If you ve got one increment in the chain the merge operation will result in update of the base im
235. ption on the encountered problem in the corresponding text fields Please don t worry we respect your privacy so none of your confidential data will be exposed This utility only collects the program s operation logs to help our Support Team find and tackle your problem Click Next to continue Welcome to Log Saver Wizard Please enter e mail address which was used while registering this product With its help Paragon Support Department will be able to associate your log files with your request through on line request system TEST _ USER gmail com Please enter description of encountered issue Log files do not contain any confidential information on the operating system settings or the user documents 3 Browse for the required location of the log files package or manually provide a full path to it Click Save to initiate the operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 208 Specify folder and file name for ZIP archive Look ir New Volume E l rA x T Name E F Local Disk C H DVD Drive D a B New Yolume E E NEW VOLUME F File name TEST _USER gmail corm 2073 08 06 23 24 zip Files of type IP archives Oo This function is also available under Windows How to Work with Bitlocked Volumes Our product allows you to accomplish a number of operations on volumes encrypted by Windows BitLocker but only when they are unlocked Until that locked
236. pyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 161 View changeson Basic Hard Disk O Your disk before operations a O Your disk after operations i O 9 Inthe Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Restore partition or disk Operation progress Copied so far 527 5 MB Read so far 582 0 MB 44 8 MB s To copy 10 0GB Write so far 582 0 MB 33 8 MBIs Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 22 Time to finish 00 08 48 Restore Primary partition 0 disk 2 from file arc_091013125156058 arc_091013125156058 pfi Data writing 10 After completing the operation close the wizard and reboot the computer To make Windows bootable on different hardware please additionally complete the P2P Adjust OS Wizard Restoring a system partition from external media CD DVD Let s assume that your computer fails to boot because of a virus attack or corruption of some system critical files But you ve got a backup of your system partition on a bootable DVD disc That s just enough to easily get your system back on track again To restore your system partition from a backup image located on CD DVD when the current OS is down please do the following 1 Insert a CD DVD disc containing the previously prepared backup image into a CD DVD drive the BIOS must be enabled to boot the system from the CD DVD d
237. r 9 Click Finish to complete the wizard then apply the pending changes Oo This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 108 Creating an incremental update to a virtual container You re allowed to do several incremental chains based on one full virtual container If selecting a sector level container the wizard will generate a sector level incremental image if having to do with a file level container a file level increment will be created To update a virtual container please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Incremental Backup to VD 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 On the Browse for Archive page specify the required full base virtual container e By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Speci a base image for an increment Show all z amp Ee Ek 9 4 2014 2 24 47 Sh YD Container FOO GE 3 3 GE n 9 4 2014 1 41 36 AM File level Archive 9 1 2014 5 06 32 AM YD Container FOO GE 5 5 GB 9 1 2014 40425 AM YO Container Switch to File view Archive File Details Name Backup HDODO_ 20140904 0217 Comment Backup image 20140904 U1 File E Backup HDDO_ 20140904 _0217 Backup_HDDO_20140904_021 7 phi Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 9
238. r _oab Delete filter _pst Delete filter ost Delete filter _dbx Delete filter log Delete filter HZ Delete filter contact Delete filter Executable amp Installations 8 filters Add filter Rename category Delete category dil Delete filter ere Delete filter ocx Delete filter wed Delete filter Add category Change general backup options In this section the program enables to specify what data should be automatically ignored during copy and sector based backup operations You can filter certain files or folders either by the manual selection or by creating masks what is more preferable Thus you will be able to effectively manage contents of your backup images or partition hard disk copies By default there are no available filters To create a filter please click the Add Category button E Filter Browse Description You can use wildcards and as file name mask Wildcards rh path are not allowed cred _ In the opened dialog the program allows the user to define the following parameters e Name Give to the filter any name you like but try to use an informative one e Filter Press the Browse button to select files or folders you would like to be excluded or specify a filter mask by using or wildcards e Description Add a short description to the filter not to miss it up later Click the OK button and you will get a new item on the list of filters By
239. rameters Fix EFI boot entry or switch EFI boot entry to another GPT bootable hard drive with Windows O5 installed 5 Confirm the operation 6 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 7 Restart the computer Fixing Windows startup ability Let s assume that due to an unknown reason your Windows fails to complete the startup procedure At first everything seems quite OK you can see the standard startup messages on the screen but at some moment it hangs up To fix your Windows startup ability please do the following 1 Start up the computer from our Linux DOS recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Inthe boot menu select Normal Mode to use the Linux recovery environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu Oo By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select Boo
240. rd has found all missing drivers it will ask you to confirm the operation Apply the changes to complete After the operation is completed the system will be bootable on the new hardware After the startup Windows will initiate reconfiguration of all Plug n Play devices It s a standard procedure so please don t worry and prepare the latest drivers at this step to get the most out of the system Advance scenario specifics 1 Tolaunch the advance mode select Set parameters for the OS adjustment i l g i i i z eg Adjust the OS to the new hardware automatically Pefom the OS adjustment in automatic mode The wizard will automatically set parameters and inject drivers Set parameters for the OS adjustment e Perform the OS adjustment in advanced mode You will be able to manually set parameters and inject drivers Parameters and inject dives jg 2 When setting additional driver repositories you can specify how to process drivers for found hardware Please specify an additional path to the missing drivers 4 Inject all necessary drivers from the specified driver repository Keep the latest diver version Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 200 e Inject all necessary drivers Mark the checkbox to force injection of all drivers for your devices from the given driver repository s even if there are already installed drivers for some hardware Please use this option
241. re selected to reduce the amount of space that is lost and the amount of fragmentation on the volume A cluster is also called an allocation unit Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 214 Extended Partition is a partition type you create only on a basic MBR Master Boot Record disk Extended partition is used if you want to create more than four volumes on a disk since it may contain multiple logical drives File System Metadata The servicing structures of a file system which contain information about allocating files and directories security information etc are named the file system metadata It is invisible for users and regular applications because its accidental modification usually makes a partition unusable Hard Disk Geometry Traditionally the usable space of a hard disk is logically divided into cylinders cylinders are divided into tracks or heads and tracks are divided into sectors The triad of values Sectors per Track Tracks per Cylinder Amount of Cylinders is usually named the Hard Disk Geometry or C H S geometry Tracks and cylinders are enumerated from 0 while sectors are enumerated from 1 These disk parameters play an essential role in the DOS Partitioning scheme Modern hardware uses an advanced scheme for the linear addressing of sectors which assumes that all on disk sectors are continuously enumerated from 0 To allow backward compatibility with older standards
242. rectories Select a source disk from the pull down list in the left pane of the page The program enables to process both mounted and unmounted without drive letter assigned partitions Besides it is possible to map a network drive Source a m x Local Disk C DVD Aw Drive D New Volume E Local Disk F NEw VOLUME G Physical partitions w System Reserved Disk 0 p w NEW VOLUME Disk 2 par E Network places E Network e Object s of operation Choose files directories you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the Add button To delete a file directory from the Clipboard select it in the Clipboard pane and press the Remove button You can also create a new folder rename or irreversibly delete existing files directories of the left pane by pressing the appropriate buttons Clipboard Source Bana MX g images F irnaqes Hame e a BOOTN amp T 2 5 config sys 2 2 if 5 pagetile sys Be 5 swaptile sys pvo AM Drive D PARAGON F New Yolune E 2 E Local Disk F I di System Yolume Information Total data size 1 GB i Files directories deleted from the Clipboard remain intact on source disks e Destination to store the object s The File Transfer Wizard allows copying data to local or network drives to physical partitions without drive letters assigned or burning them to CD DVDs Choose the way the data wi
243. red INF file PC Bue Master IDE Controller Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device 8 IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Intel R PRO 1000 MT Network Connection Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 202 Please select an INF file Look in Local Disk C EKF 3 nettpsmo int 4 4KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM d nettsbnt inf 3 2KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM S netupgrd inf 45KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM netvt86inf 4 1KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM Ge metw840 int 54KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM metw926 int 21KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM i metw940 inf 24KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM g metwlan inf BKB 6 19 2003 12 05 04 PM Ge metww48 inf 9 8KB 5 15 2001 4 00 00 PM i Be metwac inf 3 7KB 6 19 2003 12 05 04 PM Files of type INF files inf Please select hardware the driver is designed for hh Fs Compex RL2000 PC Ethemet Adapter O E2 Winbond W89C940 PCI Ethemet Adapter 1 Only show hardware found on this computer Select an INF file Cancel When selecting an INF file that contains several driver records for hardware you both have in the system and don t have you can filter the list by marking the appropriate checkbox e Remove a driver for a device which has not been found in the system Xe a ee Remove the selected device From th
244. repeat a sequence of actions on a regular basis Scheduling is only available for the Windows installation of the program e Scripting to make the program create a script of any set of operations you need Besides support of all operations available in the interactive mode the unattended mode provides some additional features such as conditional execution subroutines repeatable iterations disk partition properties analysis errors management etc Auxiliary Facilities e Conversion of basic MBR disks to basic GPT to enjoy all benefits of the newest partitioning scheme with minimal effort Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 10 File Transfer Wizard to make such operations as transferring of files directories or burning of them to CD DVD as easy and convenient as possible Providing access to Paragon backups as regular folders it may also help to replace corrupted data from a previously created image in case of an operating system failure Volume Explorer is a handy tool when you have different file systems on the disk whether they contain an operating system or just data Volume Explorer will let you explore a file system of any type and provide access to the necessary files and directories regardless of their security attributes Check Integrity Wizards to check integrity of created pbf images and virtual containers The function allows distinguishing between valid and corrupted images before using th
245. restarting the computer Please keep in mind that once you start any operation on a partition in this mode it will automatically be locked by the program thus you won t be able to keep working with it as usual e Hot processing temporary drive Here you can select a disk drive that will be used to store the temporary hot backup data by default C e Attempts to start VSS Here you can set how many attempts to start Microsoft VSS the program is to do before automatically rebooting the system and accomplishing the operation in a special boot up mode e Timeout between attempts in seconds Here you can set a time period between different attempts to start Microsoft VSS e Switch between hot processing technologies Mark the checkbox to automatically switch between Paragon Hot Processing and Microsoft VSS if one of them is unavailable at the moment D By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Run during backup options Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 41 Run during backup options Run during backup options For backup operations in the Paragon Hot Processing mode you have a possibility to run external programs and commands at different stages of the backup process The key point to link such execution to tt a short period of time when a snapshot is taken Snapshot is a map of used blocks the system is totally frozen for writing when it i taker Please specify e
246. rface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Onthe What to back up page first take a look at the ready made backup templates If none of the options meets you needs just our case then select Other Files and Folders to create a file based backup of certain data Disks or Partitions Back up your hard disk or a separate partition E rriall Back up email messages accounts and the address book of MS Outlook Outlook Express and Windows Mail Media Files Back up your photos videos music and other media files located in the user folder Documents Back up documents of all major office formats located in the My Documents folder Other Files and Folders Select files and folders to back up 5 On the What folders and files to back up page you can see a list of all partitions both mounted and unmounted available in the system Mark a checkbox opposite a file folder or even a whole partition to build up contents of the future backup image Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved Click the check bos nest to any file or folder you want to back up 133 Mame Size Date an H ac 091013140825801 10 9 2013 7 08 29 AM f arc 101013053218496 10 9 2013 10 32 29 PM f arc 101013061434390 10 9 2013 11 14 51 PM f arc 101013062903344 10 9 2013 11 53 11 PM f arc 101013091536750 10 10 2013 2 15 43 AM f arc 101013091716250
247. rimary NTFS 350MB 217 MB hae Gi hallocated Free space 499 666 0 Bytes Archive Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Paragon virtual image Yirtual Image Type Virtual Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GE After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Check Recovery Discs You ve got the ability to check whether backup media created with the program is 100 percent error free and ready to use The Check Recovery Disc Wizard will help you do that Startup Startup This function is not available for a 32 bit version of the program Click Tool Button then select Check Recovery Discs There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the operation CD DVD drive Select from the pull down list of available CD DVD devices the required drive to use during the operation Drive NECYM w ar YM ware IDE CODRA10 Eject the disc after check Set whether to eject the disk after the operation is completed or not Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 100 Result After the operation is completed you can see results of the check Edit View Sectors With the built in Edit View Sectors tool the program enables to view edit sectors on existing partitions hard disks providing the possibility to directly access and modify sectors save and restore se
248. roll back your system to the initial state on a regular basis that s exactly what you re looking for But if you want to have multiple backup archives of the same partition reflecting certain time stamps unchanged data will inevitable be duplicated in all archives and take additional space on backup media To tackle this issue there has been developed a supplementary technique called Differential Sector Backup Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 20 A differential archive only contains data changed since the time of creating a full archive which forms a base or a parental image in this case thus considerably saving your system resources It is realized by the exact bit wise comparison of the previous partition s data saved in the parental image with the current data that is actually the partition itself To restore this kind of backup you will require a full image and one of its differentials what is very convenient Differential Base to a Sector Backup sunday Monday Tuesday saturday Full Sector Backup Monday restore point Tuesday restore point Saturday restore point a Oo This function is only available for single primary and logical partitions Incremental archive is a further way of optimizing the process of disk imaging Unlike differentials it may not only contain data changed since the time of creating a full sector based archive but one of its increments as
249. rt description i To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 58 By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window The section below i e Archive File Details will also display a short description of the selected image Lookin E LocalDisk C 0 A MH Mame Size Date P arc 091013125156058 10797 2013 11 17 27 PM di arc _ 091013131559760 10797 2013 10 37 14 PM di arc _ 091013133756622 1079 2013 6 38 02 AM di arc 091013140817551 10710 2013 7 00 26 4M di arc 091013140825801 10710 2013 7 00 44 4M di arc 101013053218496 1079 2013 10 32 29 PM di arc_ 101013061 434390 10797 2013 11 14 51 PM di arc _ 10101 3062903344 1079 2013 11 53 11 PM di arc 101013091536750 10710 2013 2 15 43 4M di arc _ 101013091 716250 10710 2013 2 17 49 4M di arc 101013140759053 10710 2013 7 08 19 4M S J arc 101013141139475 10 10 2013 7 11 52 AM EAn 264 5KB 10 10 2013 7 11 52AM_ Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 3 Mware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Comment No comment it available Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 120 GB File C arc_101073741139475 arc_1010731 41139475 pot Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network
250. rt description of the selected image Please note that only sector based images of the new type with a pfi index file are available to work with Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 140 Look ir F pool Mwservere r fel 4 F H E Local Disk C a 2 DYD Drive D I F pool servere r H di Audio 46 2013 4 25 25 4M H di 4 16 2013 12 29 46 4M I b IBackup Storage 10 10 2013 12 52 24 4M S arc 091013125156055 10 70 2017 3 12 51 36 AM rU arc 091013133756622 10 10 2073 12 52 27 AM 1 arc 0910131 33756622 pf B76 KE 10 9 2013 6 38024M T Files of type Archive files r Switch to Archive List View Archive File Details Mame Local Disk Comment Mo comment is available Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used pace 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB File Yl Backup Storagerarc 0910131 337 56622rarc 091013133756622 phi Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter 5 The Archive Content page displays detailed information about the contents of the archive Archive Content Local Disk Primary MTFS 10 9 GE 39 ME Archive Details Hame Local Disk Volume label No label File system NTFS Total size 10 9 GB Used pace 39 MB Free space 10 9 GB Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 141 Oo Advanced backup settings are unavailable for se
251. rved 7 platforms have their strong sides for instance Linux can boast support of FireWire i e IEEE1394 or USB devices It enables to burn CD DVD discs However there can be some difficulties with detecting new hardware DOS in its turn has no problems of that kind but is limited in features The Linux DOS recovery environment requires no installation and can be of great help when the system fails to boot Besides it offers a Windows XP like environment WinPE based recovery environment Especially for keen followers of Windows our product offers the option to prepare a WinPE based bootable media Unlike the Linux DOS recovery environment it can boast an excellent hardware support and the same interface as the Windows version can However its system requirements are much tougher Features Overview This chapter dwells upon key benefits and technical highlights of the product Features Let us list some of the features User Friendly Fault Minimizing Interface Graphical representation of the data to gain a better understanding A handy Launcher to easily find and run the required tasks Comprehensive wizards to simplify even the most complex operations A context sensitive hint system for all functions of the program Previewing the resulting layout of hard disks before actually executing operations so called virtual operations Backup Facilities Archive Database to help the user easily manage backup images get properti
252. s get a crossed circle sign no matter which partition is selected The program enables to copy a partition only to a block of un partitioned space If you don t have a block of free space on your hard disk please delete or reduce an existing partition to accomplish the operation cannot do anything with my USB flash drive get a crossed circle sign when trying to select any area on it Some USB flash drives don t have the MBR Master Boot Record that s the cause of your problem To fix the issue please use the Update MBR function of our program or fixmbr of the Windows installation disc to write a standard code to your flash drive When trying to back up my system the program asks to restart the computer Most likely the Hot Processing mode is disabled Please make it active in the program settings When backing up a partition with the VSS Volume Shadow Copy Service mode the program throws VSS could not be started for processed volume Most likely you try to back up a FAT32 partition which is not supported by VSS Please use the Paragon Hot Processing mode instead Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 213 9 cannot back up my hard disk to an external hard drive Once started the operation is aborted with the following error Hard Disk management Error Code 0x1100a What is wrong here The problem is that the Microsoft VSS service is set as the default Hot Processing mode in the program
253. s why this operation cannot be substituted by simply copying all on disk partitions Copy Hard Disk Wizard The Copy Hard Disk Wizard is a traditional like wizard By going through its steps you configure all the necessary settings to launch the copy operation To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need 0 You need at least two hard disks to carry out this operation Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 63 Startup e Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Copy Hard Disk ale There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy hard disk operation e The hard disk to copy Select a hard disk you want to copy On this page vou can choose a hard disk you would like to copy All partitions from this hard disk will be copied to the destination you will choose on the next page Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey f a Local Disk C 499 6 GE NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey eh f E DA Ei Utils G 5 114 4 GB 310 5 GE NTFS
254. se 0S built in format routine Please select number of sectors per cluster a Z Restore defaults e Use OS built in routine Mark the option to restrict the available values according to the used OS e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Oo Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functional partition Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 71 Formatting Partitions Any partition should contain some file system to be used for keeping data The process of installing a file system is commonly known as formatting A huge variety of file systems have been developed these days Supported File Systems The program provides the ability to format partitions of the following file systems FAT12 amp FAT16 FAT32 HFS NTFS Ext2 Ext3 Ext4 Linux Swap v 2 Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Format Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Dialog Startup 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Format Partition There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview
255. seconds for each reply 1 Running tracert 172 30 10 73 Tracing route to sb349 paragon software com 172 30 10 73 over a maximum of 30 hops 1 lt ims zims lt 1ms sb349 paragon software com 172 30 10 73 Trace complete tracert 172 30 10 73 done Load from file Save to file OK Apply Cancel Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 207 e Do not resolve addresses to hostnames Mark the option to display IP addresses instead of hostnames e Maximum number of hops to search for target By default the utility goes through maximum 30 hops when searching for the target host which you can modify however e Wait timeout milliseconds for each reply By default the utility waits 4 seconds for each echo reply message If not received within the timeout an asterisk is displayed Saving log files The program enables to simplify the procedure of sending support requests to the Paragon Support Team In case of having difficulties with handling the program you with the help of this very function can address the company support engineers and provide them with all the information they need such as the disk layout performed operations etc in order to tackle the encountered problem Information of that kind is stored in log files To prepare a log files package please do the following 1 Click Log Saver 2 Provide an e mail address used for registering the product then give a detailed descri
256. sh the operation 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list Suboperation progress 1 Transfer user data Operation progress Copied so tar 0 1 MB Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 00 Time to finish 00 00 00 Transferring mntdisk sdb2 img_D3 pbf to HDDO Part1 Item 1 of 1 All operations have been finished 12 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pressing the appropriate button 13 Turn off the computer Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 194 This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media System Migration Scenarios Migrating system to anew HDD up to 2 2TB in size Let s assume that you ve bought a new hard disk that is up to 2 2TB in capacity It s faster and of much higher capacity than your current system disk so it s quite natural you start thinking about system migration We can help you do that To migrate your system to a hard disk that doesn t exceed the 2 2TB capacity limit please do the following 1 Connect both source and destination disks to the computer 2 Turnonthe computer 3 Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Copy Hard Disk There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome p
257. sic Disks under Windows Linux and PTS DOS Compressed NTFS files are also supported e Full read write access to Ext2FS Ext3FS Ext4FS partitions e Full read write access to reFS partitions e Limited read write access to Apple HFS partitions Unfortunately support of non Roman characters for the HFS file system is unavailable at the moment The company is about to implement it in the nearest future Supported Media e Support of both MBR and GPT hard disks 2 2TB disks included e IDE SCSI and SATA hard disks e SSD Solid State Drive e AFD Advanced Format Drive e Non 512B sector size drives e CD R CD RW DVD R DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R double layer and also Blu ray discs e FireWire i e IEEE1394 USB 1 0 USB 2 0 USB 3 0 hard disks e PC card storage devices MBR and GPT flash memory etc Getting Started In this chapter you will find all the information necessary to get the product ready to use System Requirements For the Windows installation package e Windows XP SP3 e Windows Vista e Windows 7 e Windows 8 e Windows 8 1 Additional requirements e To install and run the product the target OS should have Visual Studio C 2010 Runtime Library installed comes with the installation package you will be prompted to install it if it s not been found in the system Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 12 For the Linux bootable environment e Intel Pentium CPU or i
258. sult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Are you sure you want to Update master boot record Current MBAR contents for hard disk number O will be lost after this operation our computer may no longer boot correctly 3 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Changing Primary Slot Different operating systems apply different approaches to enumeration of the primary partitions In Linux In Linux every partition has a special symbolic name that encodes a hard disk containing a partition and a partition itself Partitions are addressed and accessed by using their symbolic names Symbolic names are automatically generated by Linux in accordance with the order of hard disks in BIOS and the order of partition records in the Partition Table Thus changing enumeration of the primary partitions can lead to changing of paths to some important resources In DOS The last versions of MS DOS use a rather sophisticated algorithm for a drive letter assignment A drive letter which is assigned to a partition depends on the order of records in the Partition Table Thus changing enumeration of the Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 83 primary partitions affects the drive letters assignment In early versions of MS DOS it could even lead to the unavailability of a partition The program provides the ability to change enumeration of the primary partitions This feature w
259. t Corrector You can find it in PTS DOS as well 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page select the Search for Windows installations to correct option Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 185 Please choose the operation C Search tor Windows installations to correct Correct Master Boot Record MBR Correct parition boot record Correct boot parameters boot ini BCD D Modity partition parameters To begin click Next 5 On the next page choose the required Windows installation from the list of found installations if several then select the Edit the Boot ini file option If you re not sure which installation you need please use the Properties button to get more info on the selected item Correct Windows installations Program has searched for valid Windows installations on your computer The results of the search you can see below Status 5 refers to a system partition you can edit the Boot ini file B a boot partition you can correct the System Registry N Partition Status Root System 1 ODiskO ParttionO S 6 WINDOWS WinXP For the highlighted Windows installation please point out the operation to perform Properties Correct drive letters in the System Registry Edit the Boot ini file Correct partition boot record O Adjust OS to boot on new hardware To continue click Next 6 Examine the file maybe that s where the problem is If it contains a mistak
260. t Corrector 0 GB Password Cleaner lType ree Volume lak mDiskO Si2 Registry editor Primary Network Configurator pene ae eure Primary Install Windows OS utility 39GB No label 6 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 7 On the What to back up page select your Mac hard disk Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 131 Basic Hard Disk O Model YMware Virtual Size 500 GB N Volume Type File System Size Used Free Volume label Active Hidden 0 Primary NTFS k 350 MB 257 MB 93 1 MBE System Resen Yes Yes Primary NTFS 500 GB 60 5 GB 439 GB No label No No 8 Onthe Backup Destination page select the Save data to any local drive or a network share option Please select how would you like to save the archive Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to Burn data to CD DVDIBD Choose this option tf you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DYVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 9 Select an external USB drive as a backup destination Look in NTFS 0 on Disk 1 UFSD disk 9 arc_091013125156058 3 Documents and Settings C PerlLogs C Program Files 3 Program Files x86 3 ProgramData 9 System Volume Informat
261. t device option is only available through the 64 bit WinPE media at the moment Apple Boot Camp Boot Camp is a special utility to help you set up a dual boot system Mac OS X and 32 bit Windows XP Vista on Intel based Macs It enables to securely re partition your hard disk resize an existing HFS partition to create a separate partition for Windows and then launch the installation process With Boot Camp all the necessary drivers will be at your disposal Moreover after Windows has been installed it will serve as a boot manager to choose what operating system to start up It is strongly recommended not to modify the hard disk configuration with Windows Disk Manager Otherwise it may lead to unexpected consequences right up to BSOD and 1 inability to boot in Windows XP Vista Please use our program to correctly update both MBR and GPT 64 bit Support The bulk of software today is written for a 32 bit processor It can meet the requirements of almost any end user However that is not the case when dealing with servers processing large amounts of data with complex calculations of very large numbers That is where 64 bit architecture comes into play It can boast improved scalability for business applications that enables to support more customer databases and more simultaneous users on each server Besides a 64 bit kernel can access more system resources such as memory allocation per user A 64 bit processor can handle over 4 billion ti
262. t the most accurate results Choose how to look for the deleted partitions f Quick search for partitions created by Vista or later OS f Conventional search f Thorough search y Show file systems search options i To know more on the available search methods please use the context sensitive hint system e File system filter By default the wizard will search for all known file systems However by clicking on the appropriate option on the second page of the wizard you can specify only those file systems you need amp Hide file systems search options FAT and FAT 32 file systems W NTFS file systern Linux file ystems Ext Exts and Ext Apple HFS Other unlisted file system To begin search click Next e A partition to undelete if several By default the program searches records of any deleted partition ever existed on the selected block of free space So you can get several partitions to choose from Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 77 Search deleted partitions from sector OxUOOOU00000000801 to sector OxO000000000 rt rrr CC Gee aaa eee The following partitions have been found File system Type Capacity Used Space Used NTFS Primary 7 9 GB 35 9 MB 0 Most likely the required partition will be found first If so you may abort the search operation by pressing the Stop search button Result After the operation is completed you receive a fully functiona
263. tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Undelete Partitions There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the undelete partition operation e Free blocks to scan for lost partitions Choose a free block from a tree like list of available hard disks Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 76 Click the check bos nest to any hard disk drive or free Block you want to esamine Name Type E My Computer My Computer F ta Basic MBA Hard Disk 4 VMware VMware Virtual S SCS Disk Dey Internal Hard O i Unallocated Free space The summary size of fragmentje to analyze is 7 9 GB e Search method By default the wizard selects the fastest search method for your operating system In most cases that will do to find any accidentally deleted partition However if you re under Windows XP for instance the Conventional Search option is selected but the deleted partition you re looking for has been created with the Disk Management utility under Vista the wizard won t be able to find this partition unless you manually select the appropriate option Quick Search for Partitions Created by Vista or Later OS Moreover if the wizard still fails to find the partition you need you can select the Thorough Search option to scan every single sector in the specified search area to ge
264. taken into account during copy and backup operations e HDD raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy back up a hard disk in the sector by sector mode thus ignoring its information structure e g unallocated space or unused sectors of existing partitions will be processed as well This can help to avoid problems with hidden data created by certain applications or the system administrator However it will take more time to accomplish the operation e Partition raw processing Mark the checkbox to copy a partition in the sector by sector mode to successfully process unknown file systems However it is not recommended to enable this option when working with supported file systems as it takes more time to accomplish the operation e Skip OS auxiliary files Mark the checkbox to skip OS auxiliary files like pagefile sys hiberfil sys etc thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image e Skip archive files stored in archive library Mark the checkbox to skip backup images registered in the archive database thus reducing the operation time and the resulted size of the backup image e Automatic BCD Update Unmark the checkbox to suppress automatic update of BCD Boot Configuration Data after copy restore operations Oo By clicking the link at the bottom of the window you can jump to the Copy Backup exclude options Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 40 Hot processing options
265. ted e mail message to the address you ve specitied in User e mail address field Specify e mail notification options Send E Mail notification on apply Ta Enter an e mail address here Send mail in HTML format Send complete report after applying operations Send graphical view of the disk sub system before and after apply Select the operations wou would like to be notified about This section contains a set of options that will be taken into account during the Send log files and Send e mail notification operations Outgoing mail server SMTP To send messages by using the built in mail client it is necessary to have access to a computer running an SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server All outgoing messages are first sent to the SMTP server which in its turn delivers them to the required recipients The address may be represented as a traditional Internet host name e g mail com or as an IP numeric address e g XXX XXX XXX XX User e mail address Specify an e mail address that has been assigned by the Internet Service Provider or organization s e mail administrator My outgoing server requires authentication Activate the option to allow the program to make authentication on the server before sending messages User name Enter the name that will be used to log in to the e mail account Password Enter the password that will be used to access the mail server When you re ready with the setti
266. tel to lift restrictions of the old MBR Master Boot Record and PC BIOS Basic Input Output System uEFI Unified Extensible Firmware Interface is now a recommended platform for new 64 bit Windows 8 computers And the reason is easy to catch besides other unique features impossible for the traditional tandem of BIOS MBR only a uEFl based platform enables to accommodate Windows OS on a partition larger than 2 2TB Despite all uEFI advantages however it has one quite naughty issue a pretty standard operation with a bootable device for instance involving its connection to another SATA port results in unbootable Windows You ll get the same result if Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 27 trying to boot from a cloned system hard disk or from a restored hard disk All these problems originate from the way uEFI GPT bundle is organized Microsoft provides how to guides to tackle this type of problems but they demand a great deal of experience from the user involving the use of the cmd diskpart and bcdedit tools Paragon has a better way Introducing an elegant technology realized at the user side as one simple option you can define a system GPT volume you re willing to boot from Below is a list of wizards where the uEFI switch boot device option can be found e Copy Hard Disk Wizard e Copy Partition Wizard e Restore Wizard e Migrate OS to SSD Wizard e Boot Corrector Oo The uEFI switch boo
267. tem partition will result in inability to boot the operating 1 system After having processed partitions with installed software some programs may not run properly Mount Archive The program provides the ability to assign a drive letter to a partition backup image As a result of the operation you will get a new read only partition in the system to easily browse through its contents and copy the required information even with the standard Windows tools Assign Drive Letter Before you start mounting backup images please study the following limitations e Archives can be mounted at the partition level only thus please use the Show partitions option to view all partitions inside backup images e Archives will only be mounted for the current session and won t be available after the system restart e Archives containing Windows Storage Spaces are not supported e Archives containing ReFS partitions are not supported e pVHD archives located on physical unmounted partitions or in the backup capsule cannot be mounted e pVHDLVM LDM archives are not supported In order to mount an archive you should take the following steps 1 Select a backup image in the Archive Database 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Mount the Selected Archive Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Specify a
268. the Disk and Partitions List If you click a corresponding record the appropriate wizard or dialog will be started All default values for the operation parameters will correspond to the object s settings If there too many items on the list type in the first word of the required command in the Search commands field to filter the list x Back Up Partition Burn Partition on CO DVD or BD Copy Partition Restore Partition Format Partition Delete Partition Move Resize Partition Convert File System Defragment Partition Defragment MFT Compact MFT Change Volume Label Hide Partition Mark Partition as Active Properties Panel The Properties Panel provides information on the object disk partition or block of free space selected either on the Disk Map or the Disk and Partitions List Local Disk C Volume letter C VYolume label Ho label Type Primary File system NTFS Root entries 16 Sectors per boot 3 Sectors per cluster 8 Seral number S48E 4601 cE46 9R1E Partition ID O07 NTFS ExFAT ReFS HTFS version 3 01 Volume size 499 6 GB Partition size 499 6 GB Used space 11 7 GB Free space 487 9 GB Active Mo Hidden No The Properties Panel helps to obtain the following data Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 35 For a hard disk e Model e Serial number e Type of hard disk basic or dynamic MBR GPT e Total size in GB e Information
269. the Partition Table Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 75 lt i Are you sure you want to delete volume F17 You are about to delete volume F Local Disk NTFS four computer may na longer book or work correctly Please enter the volume label to confirm deleting e Enter the volume label to confirm deleting To confirm deletion of the selected partition enter its Volume Label The current volume label is displayed above e Do not ask volume label next time Mark the option to inhibit confirmation next time you start the dialog Result By default the operation takes only a fraction of a second However the program waits until Windows completes the modification of the disk layout Advanced Partitioning Operations Here you can learn how to accomplish advanced partitioning operations Undeleting Partitions When simply deleting a partition without additional wiping disk management software only removes references to it in the Partition Table thus leaving the possibility to recover it later The program enables to find and recover these partitions A restored partition will be fully functional as long as other partitions were not created moved or exceeded the disk space occupied by that partition That is why the program offers this function only for blocks of free space The operation can be accomplished with the Undelete Partition Wizard Startup e Click the Partitioning
270. the backup capsule and automatically boots the system again The rebooting mechanism is different for different versions of Windows 6 Start the operation by clicking the Next button or return to correct the settings After the operation is completed you can place backup archives into the created backup capsule i This operation can also be accomplished with our recovery media New Backup Format Backing up hard disks or partitions to a network drive To back up one or several hard disks or individual partitions and then place the resulted image to a network share please do the following 1 Click the Backup amp Restore tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Backup to VD Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 105 Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select Back up volumes to create a sector level virtual container Please select the backup mode Back Up yolumes Back up the specitted volumes to a virtual disk container Back up files Back up the specited files to a virtual disk container 4 Select partitions or entire hard disks you d like to back up by using Shift or Ctrl to select several objects at once Click Next to proceed Press Shift or Ctrl to select several objects at once Basic MBR Hard Disk 0 VMware VMware Virtual
271. thentication e Allow Open SSH key based authentication only for SFTP If your provider requires this type of authentication mark the option to specify public and private keys and a passphrase Public key file Browse Private kep file Browse Pasephrase e Login Enter a login e Password Enter a password Click Remember password to save it next time you back up to this location e Name By default the program uses the provided address as the connection name which can be modified however Oo You need to check out yourself Windows Firewall or programs of this kind let our program work with the required port 21 for FTP and 22 for SFTP by default By clicking the Connect button the provided location will be checked If ok you ll get a new item on the list named after this location By clicking the icon you can browse it to specify a more exact location for your backups Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 38 Virtual mode options Virtual mode options Operations mode lf Allow virtual mode Set this option on to carry out all the operations virtually ou will be able to commit the changes or rollback all of them or the last one IF you switch this option off the operations Will be cared out immediately Close progress dialog automatically Set this option on to automatically close the progress dialog after committing the changes In this section you may configure th
272. tification Drive letter assignment The pull down list contains vacant drive letters that can be associated with the newly formatted partition In addition there is the possibility to make further detailed settings although the default values will do in most cases To activate the advance mode you need to mark the appropriate option at the foot of the page When it is marked the next page enables to define W Use 0S built in format routine Please select sectors per cluster E e Use OS built in routine Mark the checkbox to restrict the available values according to the used OS e The amount of sectors per cluster Define the Cluster Size for the formatted partition with this spinner control Oo Number of available options depends on the selected file system type Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 73 Dialog Setup Initially the program suggests some consistent values for all parameters In most cases you can just press the Format button to confirm the operation Are you sure you want to format volume F17 You are about to format volume F New Yolume NTFS our computer may na longer boot or work correctly Please select new tile system a Please enter new volume label New Volume w More options No e File system From the pull down list select the desired file system type In fact the program displays only those file systems that can correctly be placed to the se
273. tition of the hard drive But that is not all drive partitioning may be used for If you are willing to play games in Windows while browsing the Internet in Linux 100 percent sure that no virus will attack your PC drive partitioning is a necessity In order to run several OSs on a single hard drive you are to create a corresponding number of partitions to effectively delineate the boundaries of each OS Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 29 Scheduling The automation of operations is particularly effective when you have to repeat a sequence of actions on a regular basis For example developing a specific project on a day to day basis and having to make a backup every evening so as not to lose the valuable data you will really appreciate when this kind of routine operations will be carried out automatically without your participation Another aspect of any automation process is that it allows an optimization of your computer s work load This is especially important when operations require a considerable amount of computer resources processor time memory and more A number of tasks which can decrease the performance can be run during the night or whenever the computer has the least work load to perform The program has a special tool for scheduling You can set out a timetable for any operation and it will start at a specified time without interrupting your current activity Windows BitLocker Bit
274. to it e Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters e Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary By clicking Disconnect Drive you can delete an existing network share if necessary 5 Click the Network identification tab to change a network name of your computer generated automatically and a workgroup name j Network identification e pMa A Computer Name MININT DGKUSAV Workgroup WORKGROUP Primary DNS suffix 6 By default the wizard saves all network settings in the netconf ini file located on the WinPE RAM drive thus it will only be available until you restart the computer However you can just once configure your network device and then save this file to some other destination for instance a local drive and this way avoid constant re configuration just by providing a path to it So Click Save to file to save the netconfig ini file to the required destination Network troubleshooter Network Configurator includes a traceroute ping utility that enables to get detailed information on particular routes and measure transit delays of packets across an Internet Protocol IP network So with its help you can easily track down problematic nodes 1 If you need to ping some network host please select Ping then type in the required IP address or its name Click Start when
275. to quickly detect a partition of the supported type By manually changing its value you can manipulate accessibility of partitions In order to change a partition ID you should take the following steps 1 Select a partition on the Disk Map Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 79 2 Calla context menu for the selected object by the right mouse click then select Change Partition ID i There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject 3 Seta new ID for the selected partition eta Are you sure you want to change system ID of the partition F3 Current system ID is 0x07 NTFS ExFAT ReFS Changing system IO might prevent some operating systems from working with the partition 0x07 NTFS ExFAT ReFS f Please enter 1D manually e Predefined ID Select from the pull down list the required ID e Enter ID manually With the spinner control set the required ID value It has to be a 1 2 digit hexadecimal number 4 The operation will be performed immediately after confirmation Change Serial Number of a Partition FAT16 FAT32 and NTFS file systems include the Serial Number parameter A partition s serial number is saved in the boot sector Its value is generated while formatting The program enables to modify the serial number parameter for FAT16 FAT32 or NTFS partitions without re formatting In order
276. triction that in its turn might result in some boot problems 4 Activate the bootable recovery environment if needed With its help you will get the choice to boot directly from the backup capsule for maintenance or recovery purposes every time you start up the computer If you re attempting to embed our bootable environment to a GPT disk just our case you will be prompted to provide a path to an ISO image of the WinPE recovery environment which can be prepared with Paragon s Recovery Media Builder If you have to do with an MBR disk no preliminary actions are required as in this case there will be used a Linux based image which is included to the product by default f Allow to start recovery system from backup capsule Bootable backup capsule on selected GPT hard disk can be based on WinPE ACD only Please buid WinPE ACD ISO file either with the Boot Media Builder add on or Recover Media Builder add on supplied with your product and specify its locations C AUsers Administrator s Desktop dest iso Browse Time to display the backup capsule startup message 5 seconds Startup message preview Paragon Backup Capsule f Do not allow to start recovery system from backup capsule Creation of the bootable backup capsule on an MBR disk will result in overwriting MBR thus in case of having a third side boot manager it will be removed To avoid that you can save the current MBR with the help of the Edit View Sectors tool
277. ts equivalent with 300 MHz processor clock speed e 256 MB of RAM e SVGA video adapter and monitor e Keyboard e Mouse For the WinPE bootable environment e Intel Pentium III CPU or its equivalent with 1000 MHz processor clock speed e Atleast 1 GB of RAM e SVGA video adapter and monitor e Keyboard e Mouse Additional requirements e Network card to send retrieve data to from a network computer e Recordable CD DVD drive to burn data to compact discs e External USB hard drive to store data Installation Before the installation please make sure the systems requirements are met If everything is OK please do the following to install the product In case there is some previous version of the program installed on the computer the program will offer the user to uninstall it first 1 Click on the supplied setup file to initiate the installation First your system will be checked for the presence of Visual Studio C 2010 Runtime Library and if not found you will be prompted to install it comes with the installation package Click Install to continue Status Requirement Pending Visual C 10 0 Runtime 66 10 0 30319 1 2 The Welcome page will inform that the application is being installed Click Next to continue Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 13 Please Read Paragon License Agreement carefully and then select the appropriate option to accept Otherwise you won t be able to proceed with
278. u like to save the archive Save data to any local drives or a network share Choose this option if you want to save your data to local mounted or physical partition to USB or FireWare external drives and to a mounted network share You will be prompted to choose a location you want to save the archive to Burn data to CD DVD BD Choose this option ff you want the Wizard to burn the archive to CD DYVD BD You will be prompted to choose a drive 9 Onthe Select Destination Path page select a hard disk to copy the data to by pressing the standard browse button Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 189 Select path mntdisk sdb2 Space available on destination 321 MB Total data size nia Calc 10 On the Transfer Summary page check all parameters of the operation Click the Next button to accomplish the operation 11 In the Progress window you can see in real time a detailed report on all actions carried out by the program Operations list q Suboperation progress 1 Transfer user data Operation progress Copied so ftar 11 8 MB Overall progress Time elapsed 00 00 03 Time to finish 00 00 00 Transferring mntdisk sdb2 img_D3 pbf to HDDO Partl arc_091013131559760 Item 1 of 2 Transferring mntdisk sdb2 img_D3_0300p 000 to HDDO Partl arc_091013131559760 Item 2 All operations have been finished 12 After the operation is completed close the wizard by pr
279. uccessfully process system or encrypted partitions of any file system type no matter what kind of information they contain It can create an exact image of a partition including its service data Thus it is ideal for a backup restore of a system partition or a fast deployment to a bunch of identical computers Functioning on a file folder level it is ideal for archiving separate files or folders It enables to automatically build up contents of the future backup image by using an advanced system of filters It allows archiving data of the same volume with different backup policies It is easy and efficient when creating backup chains Demerits Resulted backup images may contain a lot of redundant data It is ineffective when trying to maintain a backup chain especially when little amount of data is being changed Backup Types It depends on a file system structure so you won t be able to process unknown file systems It cannot be used to back up a system partition It is much slower when processing large amount of data At the present moment the market is offering various types of backup imaging to meet the needs of any user Besides supporting them all our program offers a unique backup type called File Increment to a Sector Backup Full Differential and Incremental Sector Backups A full sector based backup image includes all contents of a partition or a hard disk at the moment of its creation If you
280. up of any files and folders If selecting Disk or Partitions or Other Files and Folders you will need to specify more Oo exactly the object of operation To know more on the subject please consult the Backup Scenarios chapter e Name and location of the resulted image Provide a file name for the new image and its exact location The program automatically offers an easy to understand name containing the date and the time of the archive creation which can anyway be modified Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 56 Select a folder where archive should be placed and specify archive name Archive name will be used as a sub folder where backup data files will be stored Archive location Esarctety a al x F Mame Size Date Ef My Computer a E Local Disk C New Yolume E F NEW VOLUME F J E Recover edia G E Network Archive details Archive name Jarc _tesi Estimated archive size 2 HB Space available on backup destination 92 4 GB Oo The program automatically calculates size of the future archive and informs the user about space available on the selected destination e Archive Comment You can add some additional description to the archive that will later help to distinguish it from the others Please enter a short comment to describe the archive i Ry No comment Result After the backup operation is completed you receive an image of the selected
281. ut operations click Tool Button then select View Log Files Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved a EJA Sessions Session operations Session event Show Source launcher exe Operation parameters Started 10 24 2073 at 7 06 32 4M ae Applying at 7 30 34 AM 102 5 Mount Unmount partition virtual succeeded Start time O7 14 31 Type of operation Wirtual Result Succeeded Show Source Operation parameters Create partition committed succeeded Total 6 operations 3 virtual and 3 committed Warning This session did not finished corectly Most probably the program was abnormally terminated Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl a 5 E Local Disk C NTFS NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk E a 5 q Unallocated NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl g Unallocated Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl E E Local Disk C NTFS NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 VMware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk E a 5 E New Volume E NTFS NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 2 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disl Unallocated Typical Scenarios This chapter lists a number of the most frequently used scenarios that may be accomplished with the program You can find here useful recommendations and descriptions of operations Backup
282. ver for this device amp IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device amp LS Adapter SAS 3000 series S port with 1068 Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device e Add a driver for each device that lacks it by clicking on the device then browsing for the required location The wizard will then match the device with drivers inside the given location and pick the right one Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 201 E Local Disk C e archive_db 8 7 2013 1 23 35 PM e PerfLogs 7 14 2009 6 37 05 AM fe Program Files 8 7 2013 10 38 32 AM Ge Python31 11 3 2009 3 32 46 PM Ge Users 11 3 2009 3 01 47 PM Ga j Windows 11 3 2009 3 31 23 PM H CD Drive D H Local Disk E Se E Driver Directory snvd 37 2 A device diver has been found Press OK to install this driver Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device amp Primary IDE Channel Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device 8 Intel A 82371AB7 EB PCI Bus Master IDE Controller Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device Vidware Accelerated AMD PCNet Adapter Driver not found Click here to find a driver for this device __ YHware SCSI Controller e Manually add a driver for a device that has not been found by our wizard by clicking then specifying the requi
283. very environment more preferable or Safe Mode to use the PTS DOS recovery environment in case you ve got problems with Linux Moreover you ve got the option to boot into the Low Graphics Safe Mode PTS DOS safe mode to cope with a serious hardware Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 192 incompatibility In this case only the minimal set of drivers will be included like hard disk monitor and keyboard drivers This mode has simple graphics and a simple menu By default the Normal Mode will be automatically initiated after a 10 second idle period 3 Inthe Linux launch menu select the File Transfer Wizard You can find the same wizard in PTS DOS as well 4 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 5 Select a disk where the system backup is stored from the pull down list in the right pane of the page Look in arc_091013131559760 Mw 5 3 arc_101013062156703 fit arc_091013131559760 pbt Rename FG New folder FT Delete F8 6 Double click on the required backup to open Source i NTFS 1 on Disk 0 UFSD disk arc_101013091536750 arc_101013091716250 3 Documents and Settings 9 Partition oO 2 C PerlLogs 3 Program Files 9 Program Files x86 3 ProgramData 9 System Volume Information oo Users 3 Windows 7 Select files you want to copy and place them to Clipboard by pressing the left arrow button Clipboard Source 3 MWindows
284. volumes will be recognized in the program s interface as Not formatted You can unlock this type of volumes only through Windows native facilities e Graphical user interface for Windows e manage bde command line tool for Windows and the WinPE recovery media Let s see how to unlock a volume encrypted by BitLocker in Windows and the WinPE recovery media In Windows 1 Initially we ve got a bitlocked data volume F displayed as a volume under lock in Windows Explorer Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 209 SPEAR Computer View Manage Late Uninstall of change a program 12a E g F dii y lt Ei System properties Properties Open Rename Access Map network Add 3 network Open Control media driver location Panel Manage catior twork t gt This PC v G amp G Search This PC Tr Favorites 4 Folders 6 E Desktop Jp Downloads Desktop Recent places Musi 2 Homegroup kh Downloads D usic jA This PC Pictures Videos G Network a Devices and drives 5 sa f Local Disk C E gt Floppy Disk Drive Ac a 9 49 GB free of 19 6 GB Ee System Reserved E DVD RW Drive D E SS 90 5 MB free of 249 MB MA Local Disk F 11 items 1 item selected If going to the main launcher of our program right now Open Advanced Interface this very volume will be detected as Not formatted thus no backup restore or copy operatio
285. w Archive File Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Deyr Comment My hdd 1 Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GB File Earc new arc new pbt Moreover on this page you ve got the possibility to create new folders delete existing files folders or map network drives by clicking the appropriate buttons Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter For virtual containers e An archive to verify The Browse for Archive page enables to find a backup image you need By clicking the Switch to Archive List View link you can see a list of images contained in the Archive Database if any Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 98 Show all amp R Ee Fe 2f 192013 11 02 07 PM YO Container FOO GB Archive Size Switch to File view Archive File Details Name Backup HOODOO 20131219 2300 Comment Backup image 20131219 23500 File C Backup HDODO_ 20131219 _ 2300 ph Type Full O Container Parent No Creation date 12 19 2013 11 02 07 PM To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description Oo To know more on the subject please consult the Viewing Image Properties chapter By clicking the Switch to File View link you can find the required image in the browser like window T
286. ware GmbH All rights reserved 117 2 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 3 Select partitions or entire hard disks you d like to back up by using Shift or Ctrl to select several objects at once Click Next to proceed Specify backup objects partitions or entire hard disks Press Shift or Ctrl to select several objects at once Basic GPT Hard Disk 0 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey p o Local Disk C 499 4 GE NTFS Basic GPT Hard Disk 1 WHware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey i H p Unallocated 499 8 GE Basic GPT Hard Disk 2 VMware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev R Unallocated 743 5 GE Basic GPT Hard Disk 3 VMware YMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dev l i Unallocated 115 5 GE Change backup settings Note This option is recommended for advanced users only You ve got the option to modify the default backup settings by marking the appropriate checkbox on this page By default the program will take into account exclude filters set in the Settings dialog 4 Specify location of the resulted virtual containers pVHD VHD VHDX VMDK in the Backup destination section If you d like to save them locally either enter a full path to the target folder in the corresponding field or use the Browse button to find it Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 118 amp Disk O model dware YHware irtual SCSI Disk Dev 500 GE Y
287. ware GmbH All rights reserved 90 Volume Explorer Volume Explorer is a special tool to browse and export contents of the local mounted unmounted volumes formatted to FAT16 FAT32 NTFS Ext2FS Ext3FS Ext4FS reFS file systems Besides it enables to access Paragon backups as regular folders to explorer their contents or to retrieve certain files Click the Volume Explorer tab on the Ribbon Panel to open it Hf Drives oS AY F C H D HHz Poo S E Hard Disks 1 VMware VMware Virtual SCSI Disk Device 500 GB RT Primary NTFS 350 MB G2 Primary NTFS C 499 6 GB E Recycle Bin 9 3 2013 1 49 11 PM E Documents and Settings aAA 2013 6 45 52 AM PerfLags 6 22 2013 7 22 35 AM E Frogram Files 10 22 2073 4 01 15 AM H E Frogram Files 86 9 3201 3 1 54 48 FM CEES 10 22 2013 7 00 32 AM E9 System Volume Information Export 1042272013 4 00 53 AM Users Refresh 9 3 2013 1 48 22 PM E Windows 9 3 2013 9 43 00 4M i bootmgr 417 6 KB 8 21 2013 9 31 45 PM BOOT NT 1 Bytes 67 18 2013 4 18 29 AM pagetile sys 1 1 G6 10 22 2013 3 37 45 AM swaphile sys 256 MB 107 2272013 3 37 46 4M Si 2 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 500 GB E 3 VMware VMware Virtual S SCSI Disk Device 750 GB GE 4 VMware VMware Virtual 5 SCSI Disk Device 120 GB AY Virtual Drives Call a context menu for the selected file folder by the right mouse click to export it to some other location local or network drive
288. xecutable files for each stage if necessary Esecute at the beginning of the backup process before taking a snapshot Browse Esecute after taking a snapshot Browse Esecute alter finishing the backup process Browse Change hot processing options In this section you can specify external applications to execute at various phases of the backup process It can be particularly useful when imaging systems with high availability requirements MS SQL MS Exchange etc since it enables to create a consistent snapshot even as the data is currently modified The point is to provide a coherent state of all open files and databases involved in a backup taking into account that applications may still keep writing to disks Actually the backup process consists of two phases the preparation phase snapshot and the data copying phase There are three points of the backup when external commands programs can be launched e Execute at the beginning of the backup process before taking a snapshot Here you can specify an executable file that will help you to prepare running applications for taking a snapshot It may contain specific commands programs to delete unnecessary files suspend services flush transactions or caches etc Everything depends on the used applications e Execute after taking a snapshot Here you can specify an executable file that will run just after taking a snapshot It may contain specific commands programs e g to resume
289. y n00 GB gt Switch bo File wiew Archive File Details Name Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware Mware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Deyr Comment No comment it available Type Internal Hard Disk Drive Total size 500 GE File C arc new pi To continue click Next Cancel A To get a clear cut picture on properties of the required image just click on it and the section below will i e Archive File Details display a short description including e Information on a type of the archive contents whether it is sector based or file based e Whether the archive is compressed or not e Whether the archive is password protected or not e The date when the archive was created In addition there are some special graphical flags to indicate crucial properties FLAG FUNCTIONALITY E Disk archive Partition archive F File archive Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 51 P Filtered archive Differential archive Incremental archive File increment to a partition archive To easily manage images in the Archive Database the program provides the following functionality BUTTON FUNCTIONALITY amp Refresh the contents of the database be Show only existing archives Add the selected archive to the database Delete the selected archive from the database Besides you may filter backup archives to decide whether to show only file partition or hard disk archives To do that please
290. y media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first Enable the Legacy features view Launch the Restore Wizard On the Restore Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button a P a R On the Browse for Archive page you need to specify the required backup image So you should take the following steps to do that e Select Network as a backup destination Look in E Network mi r E Disk Drives i E Local Disk C Size Date fel DVD Drive D S Physical partitions Fy System Reserved Disk 0 partition 1 Prirary MTFS F Backup Capsules ira Backup Capsule on Hard Disk 0 HN Network places E Netuwork e Mapa network disk where your archives are placed Call the Map Network Drive dialog by clicking the appropriate button Look tr E Network ad E EN F Name Size Date E Network Remote location mapping A network share el Map to drive letter Y Make permanent connection Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 165 Click the standard browse button to browse for the required network share or manually enter a path to It Define a letter from the pull down list of available drive letters Click the Connect as user button at the foot of the dialog page to specify a user name and password to access the selected network share if necessary Oo You can also map a network disk with Network Configurator e Cho
291. you copy a partition of any file system To minimize the possibility of making any mistake the wizard provides auxiliary information on every single option Moreover you can get an in depth description to any setting control or field of the wizard just by clicking the hint button and then the object you need Startup e Click the Copy amp Migration tab on the Ribbon Panel then select Copy Partition Oo There are other ways to start up this function please consult the Interface Overview chapter to know more on the subject Setup The wizard offers the following steps to accomplish the copy partition operation e The partition to copy Select a partition you want to copy On this page you can choose a volume to copy Basic MBA Hard Disk 0 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey fe Local Disk C 499 6 GB NTFS Basic MBA Hard Disk 1 Mware VMware Yirtual 5 SCSI Disk Dey T Unallocat Local Disk E ie Local Dis l F 171 8 GE FAT32 154 6 GE NTFS 162 GE e Destination disk Select a hard disk with enough unallocated space to perform the operation The wizard will create a copy of Local Disk F from Basic MBAR Hard Disk 1 WHware YHware Virtual SCSI Disk Dev Estimated size of this volume after selected files and folders will be excluded from copy operation 23 3 GB 275 124 715 616 Bytes The copy mill be created on Basic MBAR Hard Disk 3 Mware VA ware irtual SCSI Dis
292. you need from the previously created backup image for PBF and virtual containers e Restore with Shrink to restore a backup image to a free block of smaller size taking into account only the amount of actual data of the image e Adaptive Restore to successfully migrate a Windows physical system to a different hardware platform P2P by allowing automatic injection of all required drivers and the other actions crucial for a migration of this kind Oo This feature is only available for the bootable recovery environment Copy Facilities e Partition hard disk copy to successfully transfer all on disk information including standard bootstrap code and other system service structures thus maintaining the operating system s working capability Oo Copy functionality can also be used as an alternative way of data protection Partition Hard Disk Management Facilities e Basic functions for initializing partitioning and formatting hard disks create format delete Instead of the standard Windows disk tools the program supports all popular file systems e Mount a partition assign a drive letter of any file system type to make it available for your operating system e Modify file system parameters make active inactive hide unhide etc e Undelete Partitions Wizard to recover an accidentally deleted partition Automatization Facilities e Task scheduling to automate routine operations It can be particularly effective when you have to
293. ys for a system partition Bootable for a boot partition Microsoft Windows 8 x64 Destination Disk 2 Partition 3 Status Bootable Current values Registry volume letter C Partition ID 1 6 Confirm the operation 7 Click the Finish button to close Boot Corrector 8 Restart the computer Correcting BCD Boot Configuration Data To automatically correct Windows BCD please do the following 1 Start up the computer from the WinPE recovery media Please use Recovery Media Builder to prepare Paragon s recovery environments on i CD DVD flash or in an ISO image To automatically boot from the recovery media please make sure the on board BIOS is set up to boot from CD USB first 2 Launch Boot Corrector 3 Onthe Wizard s Welcome page click the Next button 4 Select Correct boot parameters to let the wizard fix BCD in all found Windows installations Copyright 1994 2014 Paragon Software GmbH All rights reserved 2 E Windows installation to corect E View the liz of all windows installations Amd crmect Boot AAA E a ernn Corect the Master Boot Record MBR View the list of all Hard Disks and comect MBR executable code on some of them Edit View Sectors View edit backup and restore sectors or a group of sectors on the hard disk or partition of your choice Corect boot parameters boot ini BCD Automatically corect boot ini and BCD on all hard disks in system J Corect EFI boot pa

Backup & Recovery™ 15 Home

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Backup &amp; Recovery&trade; 15 Home

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Backup & Recovery™ 15 Home